1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
42 % for customized page headers/footers
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
45 % change header rule width
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
55 \use_default_options false
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
62 \language_package default
67 \font_typewriter default
69 \font_default_family default
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \default_output_format default
78 \bibtex_command default
79 \index_command default
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
99 \use_package amsmath 1
100 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package cancel 0
103 \use_package mathdots 1
104 \use_package mathtools 0
105 \use_package mhchem 1
106 \use_package stackrel 0
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
108 \use_package undertilde 0
110 \cite_engine_type numerical
114 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation indent
136 \paragraph_indentation default
137 \quotes_language english
140 \paperpagestyle default
141 \tracking_changes true
142 \output_changes false
146 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
148 \author 2090807402 "usti"
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
168 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Note Note
190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
191 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
192 \begin_inset Newline newline
197 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
205 \begin_layout Standard
206 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
207 LatexCommand tableofcontents
214 \begin_layout Chapter
218 \begin_layout Section
222 \begin_layout Standard
223 LyX is a document preparation system.
224 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
225 scripts, publishable books, business
226 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
227 It is unlike most other
228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
235 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
237 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 pt type, left justified, 5
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
282 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
283 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
284 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
290 manual describes that, too.
293 \begin_layout Section
297 \begin_layout Standard
298 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
300 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
301 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
307 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
308 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
310 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
311 only a vertical scrollbar.
312 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
313 The first case is large images.
314 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
315 image and use the option
321 LaTeX and LyX options
324 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
326 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
327 this doesn't work for equations yet.
330 \begin_layout Standard
331 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
339 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
346 \begin_layout Section
350 \begin_layout Standard
351 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
352 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
353 Just select the manual you want to read from the
360 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
364 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
374 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
378 \begin_inset Index idx
381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
387 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
388 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
389 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
391 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
392 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
397 \begin_inset space \space{}
400 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
401 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
403 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
407 \begin_inset Index idx
410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
411 Reconfiguration of LyX
416 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
419 \begin_layout Section
421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
423 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
430 \begin_layout Standard
431 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
432 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
434 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
435 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
439 \begin_layout Standard
440 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
442 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
443 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
446 \begin_layout Standard
447 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
448 you can view from the menu
450 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
469 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
470 reconfigure LyX (menu
472 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
476 \begin_inset Note Note
479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
480 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
488 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
489 More about TeX Code is described in section
494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
496 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
500 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
507 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
517 \begin_inset Index idx
520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
521 Reconfiguration of LyX
526 See section 5.1 of the
530 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
533 \begin_layout Chapter
537 \begin_layout Section
538 Basic File Operations
539 \begin_inset Index idx
542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
551 \begin_layout Standard
556 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
557 in addition to some more advanced operations:
560 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
586 \begin_layout Itemize
598 \begin_layout Itemize
604 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
668 arg "dialog-show print"
674 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Standard
681 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
682 a few minor differences.
685 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
696 command lists the available templates.
697 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
698 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
699 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
707 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
714 \begin_layout Standard
715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
747 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
748 space is just that — a big, blank space.
756 \begin_layout Standard
777 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
782 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
784 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
802 will reload the document from disk.
803 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
804 and want to restore it to the last save.
813 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
814 them as your changes.
817 \begin_layout Section
818 Basic Editing Features
819 \begin_inset Index idx
822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
831 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
838 \begin_layout Standard
839 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
840 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
841 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
842 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
844 We will start with cut and paste.
847 \begin_layout Standard
848 As you might expect, the
852 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
853 various other editing features.
854 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
858 \begin_layout Itemize
872 \begin_layout Itemize
886 \begin_layout Itemize
900 \begin_layout Itemize
910 \begin_layout Itemize
920 \begin_layout Itemize
936 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
942 \begin_layout Standard
943 The first three are self-explanatory.
945 \begin_inset Index idx
948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
954 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
963 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
966 \begin_layout Standard
969 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
974 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
989 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
991 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
1000 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
1001 will start a new paragraph.
1004 \begin_layout Standard
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1015 \begin_inset Index idx
1018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1026 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset space ~
1040 \begin_inset space ~
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1050 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1055 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1058 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset space ~
1072 button to skip the current word.
1076 \begin_inset space ~
1081 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1085 \begin_inset space ~
1090 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1092 If the toggle is set, searching for
1093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1104 will not match the word
1105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1119 Match whole words only
1121 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1150 LyX offers also an advanced
1153 \begin_inset space ~
1157 \begin_inset space ~
1162 feature that is described in sec.
1163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1169 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1176 \begin_layout Standard
1177 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1178 \begin_inset space \space{}
1182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1190 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1192 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1197 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1204 \begin_layout Standard
1205 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1208 arg "inset-select-all"
1214 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1217 selects the whole document.
1220 \begin_layout Section
1222 \begin_inset Index idx
1225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1232 \begin_inset Index idx
1235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1244 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1251 \begin_layout Standard
1252 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1253 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1256 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1259 or the toolbar button
1265 to undo some mistake.
1266 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1268 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1271 or the toolbar button
1278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1285 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1289 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1292 \begin_layout Standard
1293 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1302 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1303 This is a consequence of the 100
1304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1307 step undo limit mentioned above.
1310 \begin_layout Standard
1319 work on almost everything in LyX.
1320 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1324 \begin_layout Section
1326 \begin_inset Index idx
1329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1338 \begin_layout Standard
1339 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1342 \begin_layout Enumerate
1347 \begin_layout Itemize
1352 once anywhere in the edit window.
1353 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1357 \begin_layout Enumerate
1362 \begin_layout Itemize
1368 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1374 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1377 \begin_layout Itemize
1378 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1380 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1387 \begin_layout Enumerate
1388 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1394 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1398 \begin_layout Section
1400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1402 name "sec:Navigating"
1407 \begin_inset Index idx
1410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1419 \begin_layout Standard
1420 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1423 \begin_layout Itemize
1428 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1429 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1432 \begin_layout Itemize
1433 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1435 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1438 or by the toolbar button
1441 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1447 \begin_layout Itemize
1448 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1450 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1453 and use the same menu to return to them.
1454 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1457 \begin_layout Standard
1461 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1466 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1467 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1474 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1475 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1476 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1477 your last editing position.
1480 \begin_layout Standard
1485 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1488 \begin_layout Subsection
1490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1492 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1499 \begin_layout Standard
1500 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1501 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1502 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1510 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1514 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1521 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1526 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1532 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1533 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1534 dialog and to modify the citation.
1537 \begin_layout Standard
1538 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1540 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1541 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1549 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1552 \begin_layout Standard
1553 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1554 you further to control the display.
1559 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1560 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1566 option keeps it in the current view state.
1567 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1568 \begin_inset space ~
1571 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1572 \begin_inset space ~
1575 3, the subsections of sections
1576 \begin_inset space ~
1579 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1584 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1585 \begin_inset space ~
1589 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1599 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1602 \begin_layout Standard
1604 \begin_inset space \space{}
1608 \begin_inset Graphics
1609 filename ../images/reload.png
1614 \begin_inset space ~
1617 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1618 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1621 \begin_inset space \space{}
1625 \begin_inset Graphics
1626 filename ../images/down.png
1628 groupId toolbarbuttons
1633 \begin_inset space ~
1637 \begin_inset space \space{}
1641 \begin_inset Graphics
1642 filename ../images/up.png
1644 groupId toolbarbuttons
1649 \begin_inset space ~
1652 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1653 So, for example, you can move section
1654 \begin_inset space ~
1658 \begin_inset space ~
1661 2.4 or after section
1662 \begin_inset space ~
1666 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1668 \begin_inset Graphics
1669 filename ../images/promote.png
1671 groupId toolbarbuttons
1676 \begin_inset Graphics
1677 filename ../images/demote.png
1679 groupId toolbarbuttons
1683 (or the corresponding key bindings
1691 ) you can change the level of sections.
1692 So you can for example make section
1693 \begin_inset space ~
1697 \begin_inset space ~
1701 \begin_inset space ~
1707 \begin_layout Section
1708 Input/Word Completion
1709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1711 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1716 \begin_inset Index idx
1719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1726 \begin_inset Index idx
1729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1760 \begin_layout Standard
1761 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1763 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1764 is used to propose completions.
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1768 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1770 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1775 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset space ~
1791 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1795 \begin_inset space ~
1800 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1801 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1811 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1812 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
1817 are completions available.
1822 key to accept a proposed completion.
1823 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1824 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1825 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1832 \begin_layout Standard
1833 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1834 ing options for text.
1835 The special math option
1839 enables characters to be composed.
1840 If, for example, you want to insert the character
1841 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1844 , you can then input the characters
1845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1856 to a formula to get it.
1857 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
1858 of the math toolbar.
1859 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1863 that is in LyX's installation folder.
1864 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1873 \begin_layout Section
1875 \begin_inset Index idx
1878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1885 \begin_inset Index idx
1888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1917 \begin_inset Index idx
1920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1952 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
1965 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
1967 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1971 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1978 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
1985 \begin_layout Standard
1989 \begin_inset space ~
1997 \begin_inset space ~
2018 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2022 \begin_layout Labeling
2023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2027 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2028 LatexCommand nomenclature
2030 description "Tabulator key"
2036 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2037 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2044 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2051 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2055 , especially section
2056 \begin_inset space ~
2060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2062 reference "sub:Lists"
2068 If you are still confused, look in the
2073 \begin_inset Newline newline
2080 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2081 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2085 \begin_layout Labeling
2086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2090 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2091 LatexCommand nomenclature
2093 description "Escape key"
2100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2107 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2108 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2111 \begin_layout Labeling
2112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2118 \begin_inset space ~
2122 \begin_inset space ~
2129 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2130 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2134 \begin_layout Standard
2135 There are three modifier keys:
2138 \begin_layout Labeling
2139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2157 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2158 LatexCommand nomenclature
2160 description "Control key"
2164 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2165 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2169 \begin_layout Itemize
2178 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2181 \begin_layout Itemize
2190 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2193 \begin_layout Itemize
2202 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2206 \begin_layout Labeling
2207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2225 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2226 LatexCommand nomenclature
2228 description "Shift key"
2232 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2233 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2236 \begin_layout Labeling
2237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2255 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2256 LatexCommand nomenclature
2258 description "Alt or Meta key"
2262 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2263 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2264 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2270 \begin_inset Newline newline
2273 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2275 menu accelerator keys
2278 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2279 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2283 \begin_layout Standard
2284 For example, the sequence
2285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2291 \begin_inset space ~
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2301 \begin_inset space ~
2309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2328 \begin_inset space ~
2334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2344 \begin_layout Standard
2349 manual lists all other things bound to the
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2359 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2360 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2361 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2362 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2363 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2364 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2366 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2382 followed by a capital
2389 \begin_layout Chapter
2391 \begin_inset Index idx
2394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2403 \begin_layout Section
2405 \begin_inset Index idx
2408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2417 \begin_layout Subsection
2421 \begin_layout Standard
2422 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2423 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2424 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2425 numbering schemes, and so on.
2426 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2427 and format the title of your document differently.
2430 \begin_layout Standard
2435 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2436 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2437 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2438 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2439 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2442 \begin_layout Subsection
2444 \begin_inset Index idx
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2456 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2463 \begin_layout Standard
2464 You can select a class using the
2466 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2467 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2471 \begin_inset Index idx
2474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2481 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2489 \begin_layout Standard
2490 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2494 \begin_layout Description
2495 Article for basic articles
2498 \begin_layout Description
2499 Report for basic reports
2502 \begin_layout Description
2503 Book for writing a book
2506 \begin_layout Description
2507 Letter for US-style letters
2510 \begin_layout Standard
2511 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2512 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2513 will include many of these.
2514 Here are some of the classes.
2515 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2517 Special Document Classes
2526 \begin_layout Description
2527 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2530 \begin_layout Description
2531 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2535 \begin_layout Description
2536 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2540 \begin_layout Description
2541 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2542 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2543 There are three article layouts available.
2544 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2545 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2546 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2547 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2552 sequential numbering
2553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2557 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2558 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2559 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2562 \begin_layout Description
2563 Beamer Layout for presentations
2566 \begin_layout Description
2567 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2568 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2572 \begin_layout Description
2573 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2576 \begin_layout Description
2578 \begin_inset space ~
2581 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2584 \begin_layout Description
2585 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2588 \begin_layout Description
2589 Foils Used to make transparencies
2592 \begin_layout Description
2593 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2594 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2598 \begin_layout Description
2599 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2600 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2603 \begin_layout Description
2604 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2607 \begin_layout Description
2608 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2611 \begin_layout Description
2612 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2613 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2614 (Is used by this document.)
2617 \begin_layout Description
2618 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2621 \begin_layout Description
2622 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2625 \begin_layout Description
2630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2637 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2638 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2640 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2643 \begin_layout Description
2644 Slides Used to make transparencies
2647 \begin_layout Description
2649 \begin_inset space ~
2652 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2653 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2656 \begin_layout Description
2657 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2660 \begin_layout Standard
2661 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2663 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2669 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2670 of the document classes.
2673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2677 \begin_layout Standard
2678 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2680 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2681 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2683 \begin_inset Index idx
2686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2703 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2704 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2706 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2709 \begin_layout Standard
2711 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2712 and some of them, like
2716 , are highly specialized.
2717 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2718 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2720 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2721 by some document class.
2722 There are just too many of them.
2723 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2726 \begin_layout Standard
2727 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2735 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2736 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2737 document class for a new file.
2738 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2743 Installing new LaTeX files
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2751 manual for information on how to install them.
2752 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2758 \begin_layout Standard
2759 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2760 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2762 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2763 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2764 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2766 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2770 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
2776 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2788 \begin_inset Index idx
2791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2800 \begin_layout Standard
2801 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2802 chosen document class.
2803 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2804 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2825 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2829 \begin_layout Standard
2830 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2831 always installed by default.
2832 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
2833 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2834 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2835 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2836 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2837 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2838 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2841 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2849 Reconfiguration of LyX
2855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2858 Installing new LaTeX files
2859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2866 manual for more information on installing required packages.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2870 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2878 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2879 LyX will advise you about these things.
2887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2891 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2896 \begin_inset Index idx
2899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2900 Document ! Local Layout
2908 \begin_layout Standard
2909 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2910 used in a variety of different documents.
2911 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2912 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2913 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2914 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2915 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2916 What you want is LyX's
2917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2933 manual for information on how to use it.
2936 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2940 \begin_layout Standard
2941 Each class has a default set of options.
2942 Here's a quick table describing them:
2945 \begin_layout Standard
2946 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 \begin_inset Tabular
2955 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
2956 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2960 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2961 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 \begin_layout Standard
3416 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3422 \begin_layout Standard
3423 You're probably also wondering what
3424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3428 \begin_inset space ~
3432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3436 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3437 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3442 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3447 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3457 headings, there are also
3465 headings, and so on.
3466 We will describe these headings fully in section
3467 \begin_inset space ~
3471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3473 reference "sub:Headings"
3480 \begin_layout Subsection
3482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3484 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3489 \begin_inset Index idx
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3501 \begin_inset Index idx
3504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 \begin_layout Standard
3514 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3516 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3523 \begin_inset space ~
3531 \begin_inset space ~
3536 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3538 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3539 to use for your document.
3540 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3544 \begin_layout Standard
3548 \begin_inset space ~
3555 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3561 \begin_inset space ~
3566 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3567 You can choose between the following five options:
3570 \begin_layout Labeling
3571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3576 Use default page style of current class.
3579 \begin_layout Labeling
3580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3585 No page numbers or headings.
3588 \begin_layout Labeling
3589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3597 \begin_layout Labeling
3598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3603 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3604 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3605 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3608 \begin_layout Labeling
3609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3614 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3615 have the LaTeX-package
3620 \begin_inset Index idx
3623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3630 How they are defined is explained in section
3631 \begin_inset space ~
3635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3637 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3644 \begin_layout Standard
3645 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3646 \begin_inset space ~
3650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3652 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3659 \begin_layout Subsection
3660 Paper Size and Orientation
3661 \begin_inset Index idx
3664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3665 Document ! Paper size
3671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3673 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3680 \begin_layout Standard
3681 You can find the following options in the menu
3684 \begin_inset space ~
3691 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3697 \begin_inset Index idx
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3709 \begin_layout Labeling
3710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3714 \begin_inset space ~
3719 What size paper to print on.
3724 \begin_layout Itemize
3730 \begin_layout Itemize
3736 \begin_layout Itemize
3742 \begin_layout Itemize
3748 \begin_layout Itemize
3751 US letter, US legal, US executive
3754 \begin_layout Itemize
3760 \begin_layout Itemize
3767 \begin_layout Labeling
3768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3773 To choose whether to output as
3784 \begin_layout Labeling
3785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3794 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3795 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3798 \begin_layout Subsection
3800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3807 \begin_inset Index idx
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3817 \begin_inset Index idx
3820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 \begin_layout Standard
3830 Paper margins are set in the menu
3832 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3836 \begin_inset Index idx
3839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3850 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3851 the paper format and the font size into account.
3854 \begin_layout Subsection
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3864 That includes the paragraph environments.
3865 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3866 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3867 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3868 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3877 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3879 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3880 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3881 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3884 \begin_layout Section
3885 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3886 \begin_inset Index idx
3889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3890 Paragraph ! Indentation
3898 \begin_layout Subsection
3900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3902 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3909 \begin_layout Standard
3910 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3911 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3914 \begin_layout Standard
3915 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3916 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3917 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3918 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3922 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3928 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3929 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3930 language than English.
3931 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
3935 \begin_layout Standard
3936 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
3937 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
3939 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
3940 LyX takes care of that.
3941 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
3943 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
3944 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
3945 of a page, and so on.
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
3955 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
3956 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
3960 these pre-coded spacings.
3961 We will explain more later.
3964 \begin_layout Subsection
3965 Paragraph Separation
3966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3968 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3973 \begin_inset Index idx
3976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3977 Paragraph ! Separation
3985 \begin_layout Standard
3993 \begin_inset space ~
4001 \begin_inset space ~
4008 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset Index idx
4015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4021 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4024 \begin_layout Subsection
4028 \begin_layout Standard
4029 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4032 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4034 \begin_inset space ~
4039 dialog and toggle the
4042 \begin_inset space ~
4047 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4050 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4054 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4055 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4059 \begin_layout Standard
4060 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4061 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4064 \begin_layout Subsection
4066 \begin_inset Index idx
4069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4070 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4078 \begin_layout Standard
4081 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4085 \begin_inset Index idx
4088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4097 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4101 \begin_inset space ~
4110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4111 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4125 installed to use this feature.
4130 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4132 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset space ~
4139 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4140 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4143 \begin_layout Section
4144 Paragraph Environments
4145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4147 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4152 \begin_inset Index idx
4155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4156 Paragraph ! Environments
4162 \begin_inset Index idx
4165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4166 Paragraph environments|(
4174 \begin_layout Subsection
4178 \begin_layout Standard
4179 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4182 \begin_layout Standard
4201 \begin_inset Newline newline
4204 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4205 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4206 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4215 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4218 \begin_layout Standard
4219 A paragraph environment is simply a
4220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4227 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4228 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4229 scheme, labels, and so on.
4230 Additionally, you can
4231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4238 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4239 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4240 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4241 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4243 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4245 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4248 \begin_layout Standard
4249 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4250 \begin_inset Graphics
4251 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4257 at the left end of the toolbar.
4258 LyX will change the environment of the
4262 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4263 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4264 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4277 create a new paragraph using the
4281 paragraph environment.
4283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4290 because if you are in one of these environments:
4293 \begin_layout Itemize
4299 \begin_layout Itemize
4305 \begin_layout Itemize
4311 \begin_layout Itemize
4317 \begin_layout Itemize
4323 \begin_layout Itemize
4329 \begin_layout Itemize
4335 \begin_layout Standard
4336 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4340 , rather than resetting it to
4345 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4346 \begin_inset space ~
4350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4352 reference "sec:Nesting"
4359 \begin_layout Subsection
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 The default paragraph environment is
4369 It creates a plain paragraph.
4370 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4371 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4372 this manual) are in the
4379 \begin_layout Standard
4380 You can nest a paragraph using the
4384 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4392 \begin_layout Subsection
4394 \begin_inset Index idx
4397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4406 \begin_layout Standard
4407 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4416 for thanks or contact information.
4417 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4418 page along with today's date.
4419 For other types of documents, the title
4420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4427 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4431 \begin_layout Standard
4432 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4446 Here's how you use them:
4449 \begin_layout Itemize
4450 Put the title of your document in the
4457 \begin_layout Itemize
4458 Put the author name in the
4465 \begin_layout Itemize
4466 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4467 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4473 Note that using this environment is optional.
4474 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4475 If you don't want a date, use the option
4477 Suppress default date on front page
4481 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4482 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4484 \begin_inset space ~
4492 \begin_layout Standard
4493 You can use footnotes to insert
4494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4501 or contact information.
4504 \begin_layout Subsection
4506 \begin_inset Index idx
4509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4527 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4532 \begin_inset Index idx
4535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4536 Section headings ! Numbered
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4549 \begin_layout Enumerate
4555 \begin_layout Enumerate
4561 \begin_layout Enumerate
4567 \begin_layout Enumerate
4573 \begin_layout Enumerate
4579 \begin_layout Enumerate
4585 \begin_layout Enumerate
4591 \begin_layout Standard
4592 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4593 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4594 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4597 \begin_layout Standard
4598 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4599 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4600 You group the book into chapters.
4601 LyX does a similar grouping:
4604 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 is divided into either
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4632 \begin_layout Itemize
4644 \begin_layout Itemize
4656 \begin_layout Itemize
4668 \begin_layout Itemize
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4681 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4689 Not all document types use the
4693 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4698 is the top-level heading.
4706 \begin_layout Standard
4711 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4712 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4714 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4728 \begin_inset Index idx
4731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4732 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4740 \begin_layout Standard
4741 The unnumbered section headings have a
4742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4749 at the end of their name.
4750 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4751 the table of contents, see section
4752 \begin_inset space ~
4756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4766 Changing the Numbering
4767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4769 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4776 \begin_layout Standard
4777 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4778 in the Table of Contents.
4779 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4781 Just as certain classes start with
4795 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4805 This is something you can change.
4808 \begin_layout Standard
4811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4815 \begin_inset Index idx
4818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4827 \begin_inset space ~
4831 \begin_inset space ~
4836 you will see two counters.
4841 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4843 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4848 Short Titles of Headings
4849 \begin_inset Index idx
4852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4853 Section headings ! Short titles
4859 \begin_inset Argument 1
4862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4871 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4878 \begin_layout Standard
4879 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4880 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4881 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4882 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4886 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4887 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4888 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4889 To specify a short title, use the menu
4891 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4893 \begin_inset space ~
4899 This will insert a box labeled
4900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4915 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
4916 This also works for captions inside floats.
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
4923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4927 \begin_layout Standard
4928 The following information applies to all section headings:
4931 \begin_layout Itemize
4932 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
4939 \begin_layout Itemize
4940 You can only use inline math in these environments.
4943 \begin_layout Itemize
4944 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
4947 \begin_layout Subsection
4948 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
4951 \begin_layout Standard
4952 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
4966 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
4967 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
4968 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
4969 the text they contain.
4970 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
4978 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
4991 when you start a new paragraph.
4992 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
4996 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
4997 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
4998 have to change back to the
5002 environment yourself.
5005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5022 \begin_inset Index idx
5025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5034 \begin_layout Standard
5035 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5036 time for the differences.
5045 are identical except for one difference:
5049 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5058 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5062 Here's an example of the
5075 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5077 See – no indentation!
5081 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5082 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5083 the other paragraph.
5086 \begin_layout Standard
5087 Here's another example, this time in the
5094 \begin_layout Quotation
5100 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5101 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5102 the first line, then
5106 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5110 you were quoting other text.
5113 \begin_layout Quotation
5114 Here's a new paragraph.
5115 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5116 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5119 \begin_layout Standard
5120 As the examples show,
5124 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5125 They should put quotes in the
5130 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5134 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5143 \begin_inset Index idx
5146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5155 \begin_inset Index idx
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5174 \begin_layout Standard
5179 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5185 \begin_inset Newline newline
5188 Which I did not rehearse!
5192 It could be much worse.
5193 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5195 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5196 indented a bit more than the first.
5197 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5203 \begin_inset Newline newline
5206 And make things look fine
5207 \begin_inset Newline newline
5213 arg "newline-insert newline"
5219 \begin_layout Standard
5224 does not indent both margins.
5225 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5226 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5233 arg "newline-insert newline"
5239 \begin_layout Subsection
5241 \begin_inset Index idx
5244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5260 \begin_layout Standard
5261 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5271 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5280 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5281 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5282 describing some general features of all four of them.
5285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5289 \begin_layout Standard
5290 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5292 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5301 reset the environment to
5305 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5306 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5307 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5311 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5315 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5322 \begin_layout Standard
5323 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5324 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5326 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5327 you read all of section
5328 \begin_inset space ~
5332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5334 reference "sec:Nesting"
5341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5347 \begin_inset Index idx
5350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5366 \begin_layout Standard
5367 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5371 paragraph environment.
5372 It has the following properties:
5375 \begin_layout Itemize
5376 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 The items can have any length.
5391 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5392 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5399 \begin_layout Itemize
5404 environment inside another
5408 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5420 \begin_layout Itemize
5422 \begin_inset space ~
5426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5428 reference "sec:Nesting"
5432 for a full explanation of nesting.
5436 \begin_layout Standard
5437 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5446 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5449 \begin_layout Standard
5450 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5451 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5454 \begin_layout Itemize
5455 The label for the first level
5459 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5463 \begin_layout Itemize
5464 The label for the second level is a dash.
5468 \begin_layout Itemize
5469 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5473 \begin_layout Itemize
5474 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5478 \begin_layout Itemize
5479 Back out to the third level.
5483 \begin_layout Itemize
5484 Back to the second level.
5488 \begin_layout Itemize
5489 Back to the outermost level.
5492 \begin_layout Standard
5493 These are the default labels for an
5498 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5500 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5503 dialog in the submenu
5508 \begin_inset Index idx
5511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5517 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5520 \begin_layout Standard
5521 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5522 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5524 \begin_inset space ~
5528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5530 reference "sec:Nesting"
5537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5543 \begin_inset Index idx
5546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5555 name "sec:Enumerate"
5562 \begin_layout Standard
5567 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5568 It has these properties:
5571 \begin_layout Enumerate
5572 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5576 \begin_layout Enumerate
5577 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5581 \begin_layout Enumerate
5582 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5585 \begin_layout Enumerate
5590 environment resets the counter to one.
5593 \begin_layout Enumerate
5606 \begin_layout Enumerate
5607 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5608 Items can have any length.
5611 \begin_layout Enumerate
5612 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5615 \begin_layout Enumerate
5616 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5619 \begin_layout Enumerate
5620 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5633 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5634 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5641 \begin_layout Enumerate
5642 The first level of an
5646 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5650 \begin_layout Enumerate
5651 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5655 \begin_layout Enumerate
5656 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5660 \begin_layout Enumerate
5661 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5664 \begin_layout Enumerate
5665 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5670 \begin_layout Enumerate
5671 Back to the third level
5675 \begin_layout Enumerate
5676 Back to the second level.
5680 \begin_layout Enumerate
5681 Back to the outermost level.
5684 \begin_layout Standard
5685 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5689 environment, see section
5690 \begin_inset space ~
5694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5696 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5701 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5704 \begin_layout Standard
5705 There is more to nesting
5709 environments than we've stated here.
5710 You should read section
5711 \begin_inset space ~
5715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5717 reference "sec:Nesting"
5721 to learn more about nesting.
5724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5730 \begin_inset Index idx
5733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5747 list has no fixed label.
5748 Instead, LyX uses the first
5749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5756 of the first line as the label.
5760 \begin_layout Description
5761 Example: This is an example of the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5782 it is meant that the first usage of the
5786 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5788 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5796 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
5801 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5802 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5804 \begin_inset space ~
5810 \begin_inset space ~
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5816 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5820 for more information.) Here is an example:
5823 \begin_layout Description
5825 \begin_inset space ~
5828 Example: This one shows how to use a
5831 \begin_inset space ~
5843 \begin_layout Description
5844 Usage: You should use the
5848 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5849 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5851 It's not a good idea to use a
5855 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5856 You're better off using
5868 paragraphs into them.
5871 \begin_layout Description
5872 Nesting: You can nest
5876 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5880 \begin_layout Standard
5881 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5882 them from the first line.
5885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5887 \begin_inset Index idx
5890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5904 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5907 \begin_layout Standard
5916 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
5918 Here are its properties:
5921 \begin_layout Labeling
5922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5924 \begin_inset space ~
5927 labels LyX uses the first
5928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5935 of each line as the item label.
5940 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
5941 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
5942 space as described above.
5945 \begin_layout Labeling
5946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5947 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
5948 the body of the item text.
5949 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
5950 label width plus a little extra space.
5954 \begin_layout Labeling
5955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5957 \begin_inset space ~
5960 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
5962 If the label width is larger, the label
5963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5970 into the first line.
5971 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
5972 margin of the rest of the item text.
5975 \begin_layout Labeling
5976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5978 \begin_inset space ~
5981 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
5986 environment has the same left margin.
5987 \begin_inset Newline newline
5990 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
5993 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5995 \begin_inset space ~
6000 dialog (toolbar button
6003 arg "layout-paragraph"
6010 \begin_inset space ~
6015 determines the default label width.
6016 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6025 multiple times instead.
6026 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6035 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6043 every time you alter a label in a
6048 \begin_inset Newline newline
6051 The predefined default width is the length of
6052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6060 \begin_inset space ~
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6071 list the same way as the
6075 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6081 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6085 \begin_layout Standard
6090 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6091 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6093 \begin_inset space ~
6097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6099 reference "sec:Nesting"
6103 to learn about nesting.
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6107 There is yet another feature of the
6111 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6113 You can use additional
6117 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6122 are documented in section
6123 \begin_inset space ~
6127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6129 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6134 Here are some examples:
6137 \begin_layout Labeling
6138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6139 Left The default for
6146 \begin_layout Labeling
6147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6148 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6155 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6158 \begin_layout Labeling
6159 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6160 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6164 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6171 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6174 \begin_layout Subsection
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6178 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6183 \begin_inset Index idx
6186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6195 \begin_layout Standard
6196 The features described in this section require that the module
6198 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6200 is loaded in the document settings.
6201 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6206 \begin_inset Index idx
6209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6210 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6219 Custom Enumerate Lists
6220 \begin_inset Index idx
6223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6224 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6237 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6240 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6241 There you add the command
6244 \begin_layout Standard
6252 \begin_layout Standard
6253 in TeX Code (shortcut
6263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6264 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6271 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6284 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6291 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6292 For capital Roman numerals replace
6304 in the command above.
6305 For Arabic numerals use
6313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6320 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6337 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 You can only number 26
6346 \begin_inset space ~
6349 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6357 \begin_layout Standard
6358 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6359 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6363 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6366 \begin_layout Enumerate
6367 \begin_inset Argument 1
6370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6396 \begin_layout Enumerate
6397 \begin_inset Argument 1
6400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6423 \begin_layout Enumerate
6428 \begin_layout Enumerate
6429 \begin_inset Argument 1
6432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6456 \begin_layout Enumerate
6457 \begin_inset Argument 1
6460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6486 \begin_layout Standard
6487 For this list these commands were used:
6490 \begin_layout Standard
6501 \begin_inset Newline newline
6509 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 \begin_inset Newline newline
6527 \begin_layout Standard
6534 makes the label emphasized and
6543 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6553 lists until you change the definition.
6561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6563 \begin_inset Index idx
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6575 \begin_layout Standard
6576 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6579 \begin_layout Enumerate
6580 \begin_inset Argument 1
6583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6602 \begin_inset Note Note
6605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6606 goes back to default numbering
6614 \begin_layout Enumerate
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6622 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6626 \begin_layout Standard
6627 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6632 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6633 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6636 \begin_layout Standard
6637 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6645 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6653 \begin_layout Standard
6654 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6656 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6657 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6658 of a normal enumeration.
6659 There, insert the command
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6668 \begin_layout Standard
6673 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6681 \begin_layout Enumerate
6685 \begin_layout Standard
6686 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6689 \begin_layout Enumerate
6690 \begin_inset Argument 1
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6709 This enumeration starts at 4
6712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6714 \begin_inset Index idx
6717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6726 \begin_layout Standard
6727 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6729 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6732 \begin_layout Itemize
6736 \begin_layout Itemize
6737 with standard spacing
6740 \begin_layout Standard
6741 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6743 Add there the command
6747 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6750 \begin_layout Itemize
6751 \begin_inset Argument 1
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6773 \begin_layout Itemize
6777 \begin_layout Itemize
6781 \begin_layout Standard
6782 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6788 \begin_inset Index idx
6791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6798 For more information see its documentation,
6799 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6809 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6811 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6812 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6816 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6819 \begin_layout Enumerate
6820 \begin_inset Argument 1
6823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6844 \begin_layout Enumerate
6845 with negative indentation
6848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6849 Further Customization
6850 \begin_inset Index idx
6853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 Lists ! Customization
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 You can also change the style of description lists.
6867 \begin_layout Standard
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6874 changes the description label font, the command
6877 \begin_layout Standard
6883 \begin_layout Standard
6884 sets the list style.
6887 \begin_layout Standard
6888 An example where the command
6891 \begin_layout Standard
6896 itshape, style=nextline
6899 \begin_layout Standard
6903 \begin_layout Description
6905 \begin_inset space ~
6909 \begin_inset Argument 1
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6918 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
6920 itshape, style=nextline
6930 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
6931 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
6935 \begin_layout Description
6937 \begin_inset space ~
6940 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
6941 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
6942 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
6945 \begin_layout Standard
6946 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
6952 \begin_inset Index idx
6955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6956 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6962 For more information see its documentation
6963 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6972 \begin_layout Subsection
6974 \begin_inset Index idx
6977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6994 \begin_inset space ~
7002 \begin_layout Standard
7003 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7011 \begin_inset space ~
7017 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7018 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7019 In contrast, you can use the
7026 \begin_inset space ~
7031 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7032 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7036 \begin_layout Standard
7037 Of course, you're not limited to using
7044 \begin_inset space ~
7053 \begin_inset space ~
7058 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7059 some European academic papers.
7062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7066 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7078 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7079 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7083 \begin_inset space ~
7088 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7089 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7090 Here's an example of each:
7093 \begin_layout Right Address
7095 \begin_inset Newline newline
7099 \begin_inset Newline newline
7103 \begin_inset Newline newline
7106 When is it? What is today?
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7113 \begin_inset space ~
7119 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7120 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7121 Here's an example of the
7128 \begin_layout Address
7130 \begin_inset Newline newline
7133 Where do I send this
7134 \begin_inset Newline newline
7137 Your post office and country
7140 \begin_layout Standard
7141 As you can see, both
7148 \begin_inset space ~
7153 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7158 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7164 This makes sense, since
7172 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7173 Thus, you have to use
7180 arg "newline-insert newline"
7185 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7186 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7188 \begin_inset space ~
7192 \begin_inset space ~
7197 ) to start a new line in an
7204 \begin_inset space ~
7212 \begin_layout Subsection
7216 \begin_layout Standard
7217 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7218 or list of references.
7219 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7222 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7226 \begin_inset Index idx
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7243 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7244 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7245 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7246 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7260 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7261 The book document classes ignores the
7265 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7269 in a letter document class.
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment does several things for you.
7278 First, it puts the centered label
7279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7287 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7289 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7290 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7291 the subsequent text.
7292 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7293 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7297 \begin_layout Standard
7298 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7302 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7303 The new paragraph will still be in the
7308 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7309 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7312 \begin_layout Standard
7313 \begin_inset Float figure
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7320 \begin_inset Graphics
7321 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7334 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7356 We would love to demonstrate the
7360 environment, but since this document is in the
7361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7368 class, we can't do this.
7369 We inserted it therefore as figure
7370 \begin_inset space ~
7374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7376 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7381 If you have never heard of an
7382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7389 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7398 \begin_inset Index idx
7401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7410 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7417 \begin_layout Standard
7422 environment is used to list references.
7423 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7424 only use it at the end of the document.
7436 \begin_layout Standard
7437 When you first open a
7441 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7457 depending on the document class.
7458 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7459 Each paragraph of the
7463 environment is a bibliography entry.
7468 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7469 Each new paragraph is still in the
7476 \begin_layout Standard
7477 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7478 by using a BibTeX database.
7479 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7480 phy handling, have a look at section
7481 \begin_inset space ~
7485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7487 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7494 \begin_layout Subsection
7498 \begin_inset Index idx
7501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7502 Paragraph ! LyX code
7508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7522 environment is another LyX extension.
7523 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7528 key as a fixed whitespace;
7532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 \begin_inset space ~
7549 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7554 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7555 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7558 arg "newline-insert newline"
7575 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7576 So, when you finish using the
7580 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7581 Also, you can nest the
7585 environment inside of others.
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7592 \begin_layout Itemize
7596 arg "newline-insert newline"
7599 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7604 \begin_inset space \space{}
7614 arg "newline-insert newline"
7620 \begin_layout Itemize
7624 arg "newline-insert newline"
7635 \begin_layout Itemize
7640 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7647 \begin_layout Itemize
7651 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7658 \begin_layout Itemize
7659 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7660 You must put at least one
7664 in any line you want blank.
7665 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7668 \begin_layout Itemize
7669 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7673 since that will insert
7678 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7681 arg "self-insert \""
7687 \begin_layout Standard
7691 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7707 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7708 printf("Hello World!
7713 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7717 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7721 \begin_layout Standard
7722 This is just the standard
7723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7734 \begin_layout Standard
7739 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7740 rc-files, and so on.
7741 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7742 as if you used a typewriter.
7743 \begin_inset Index idx
7746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7747 Paragraph environments|)
7752 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7755 Program Code Listings
7760 \begin_inset space ~
7768 \begin_layout Section
7769 Nesting Environments
7770 \begin_inset Index idx
7773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7774 Nesting ! Environments
7780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7789 \begin_layout Subsection
7793 \begin_layout Standard
7794 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7796 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7798 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7800 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7812 \begin_layout Enumerate
7816 \begin_layout Enumerate
7821 \begin_layout Enumerate
7825 \begin_layout Enumerate
7830 \begin_layout Enumerate
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7835 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7836 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7838 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7840 \begin_inset space ~
7844 \begin_inset space ~
7852 \begin_inset space ~
7856 \begin_inset space ~
7861 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
7863 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7866 arg "depth-increment"
7872 arg "depth-decrement"
7886 arg "depth-increment"
7892 arg "depth-decrement"
7896 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
7897 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7901 \begin_layout Standard
7902 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7903 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7904 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7905 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7910 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7912 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7915 \begin_layout Subsection
7916 What You Can and Can't Nest
7919 \begin_layout Standard
7920 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
7921 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
7924 \begin_layout Standard
7925 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
7926 than a simple yes or no.
7927 There are three types of paragraph environments:
7930 \begin_layout Itemize
7931 Completely unnestable
7934 \begin_layout Itemize
7935 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
7939 \begin_layout Itemize
7940 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
7944 \begin_layout Standard
7945 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
7946 environments have them:
7949 \begin_layout Description
7950 Unnestable Can't nest them.
7951 Can't nest into them.
7955 \begin_layout Itemize
7961 \begin_layout Itemize
7967 \begin_layout Itemize
7973 \begin_layout Itemize
7979 \begin_layout Itemize
7986 \begin_layout Description
7988 \begin_inset space ~
7991 Nestable You can nest them.
7992 You can nest other things into them.
7996 \begin_layout Itemize
8002 \begin_layout Itemize
8008 \begin_layout Itemize
8014 \begin_layout Itemize
8020 \begin_layout Itemize
8026 \begin_layout Itemize
8032 \begin_layout Itemize
8038 \begin_layout Itemize
8045 \begin_layout Description
8046 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8047 You can't nest anything into them.
8051 \begin_layout Itemize
8057 \begin_layout Itemize
8063 \begin_layout Itemize
8069 \begin_layout Itemize
8075 \begin_layout Itemize
8081 \begin_layout Itemize
8087 \begin_layout Itemize
8093 \begin_layout Itemize
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8105 \begin_layout Itemize
8111 \begin_layout Itemize
8117 \begin_layout Itemize
8123 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 \begin_inset space ~
8139 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 \begin_layout Standard
8147 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8155 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8165 \begin_inset space ~
8168 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8169 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8170 nested section headings violate this.
8178 \begin_layout Subsection
8179 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8180 \begin_inset Index idx
8183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8184 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8194 affected by nesting anyhow.
8198 \begin_layout Itemize
8202 \begin_layout Itemize
8206 \begin_layout Itemize
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 Figures and tables in
8224 are not affected by this.
8229 Have a look at section
8230 \begin_inset space ~
8234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8236 reference "sec:Floats"
8240 for more information about
8247 \begin_layout Standard
8248 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8249 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8253 \begin_layout Standard
8254 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8262 of its own, it behaves just like a
8263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8270 paragraph environment.
8271 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8276 Here's an example with a table:
8279 \begin_layout Enumerate
8284 \begin_layout Enumerate
8285 This is (a) and it's nested.
8289 \begin_layout Standard
8290 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8296 \begin_layout Standard
8298 \begin_inset Tabular
8299 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8300 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8302 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8387 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8394 \begin_layout Enumerate
8396 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8400 \begin_layout Enumerate
8404 \begin_layout Standard
8405 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8408 \begin_layout Enumerate
8413 \begin_layout Enumerate
8414 This is (a) and it's nested.
8418 \begin_layout Standard
8419 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8425 \begin_layout Standard
8427 \begin_inset Tabular
8428 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8429 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8431 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8522 \begin_layout Enumerate
8529 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8532 \begin_layout Enumerate
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8544 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8547 \begin_layout Enumerate
8552 \begin_layout Enumerate
8553 This is (a) and it's nested.
8556 \begin_layout Standard
8557 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8565 \begin_inset Tabular
8566 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8567 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8569 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8654 \begin_layout Standard
8655 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8661 \begin_layout Enumerate
8663 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8670 \begin_layout Enumerate
8674 \begin_layout Standard
8675 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8681 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8682 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8686 \begin_layout Subsection
8687 Usage and General Features
8690 \begin_layout Standard
8691 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8700 is the innermost possible depth.
8701 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8704 \begin_layout Enumerate
8705 level #1 – outermost
8709 \begin_layout Enumerate
8714 \begin_layout Enumerate
8719 \begin_layout Enumerate
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Standard
8739 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8740 both of them in the example.
8741 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8751 For example, if we tried to nest another
8756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8763 , we would get errors.
8766 \begin_layout Subsection
8768 \begin_inset Index idx
8771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8781 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8782 We have several examples of nested environments.
8783 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8788 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8791 \begin_layout Labeling
8792 \labelwidthstring MMM
8793 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8802 \begin_layout Labeling
8803 \labelwidthstring MMM
8804 #2-a This is level #2.
8805 We created it by using
8808 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8814 arg "depth-increment"
8821 \begin_layout Labeling
8822 \labelwidthstring MMM
8823 #3-a This is level #3.
8824 This time, we just enter
8831 arg "depth-increment"
8835 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8839 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8845 arg "depth-increment"
8852 \begin_layout Standard
8857 environment, nested inside of
8858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8866 So, it's at level #4.
8867 We did this by entering
8870 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8876 arg "depth-increment"
8879 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8884 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8900 \begin_layout Standard
8905 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8908 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8914 \begin_layout Labeling
8915 \labelwidthstring MMM
8916 #4-a This is level #4.
8920 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8923 and changed the paragraph environment back to
8928 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
8932 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
8937 keep nesting things inside
8938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8949 \begin_layout Labeling
8950 \labelwidthstring MMM
8951 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
8956 \begin_layout Labeling
8957 \labelwidthstring MMM
8958 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
8959 and this is level #6.
8960 By now, you should know how we made these two.
8964 \begin_layout Labeling
8965 \labelwidthstring MMM
8966 #5-b Back to level #5.
8970 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8976 arg "depth-decrement"
8983 \begin_layout Labeling
8984 \labelwidthstring MMM
8988 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8994 arg "depth-decrement"
8997 , we're back at level #4.
9001 \begin_layout Labeling
9002 \labelwidthstring MMM
9003 #3-b Back to level #3.
9004 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9008 \begin_layout Labeling
9009 \labelwidthstring MMM
9010 #2-b Back to level #2.
9015 \begin_layout Labeling
9016 \labelwidthstring MMM
9017 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9018 After this sentence, we will enter
9022 and change the paragraph environment back to
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 We could have also used the
9046 environment in place of the
9051 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9055 Example 2: Inheritance
9058 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9059 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9062 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9071 arg "depth-increment"
9075 \begin_inset Newline newline
9078 which, we will change to the
9086 \begin_layout Enumerate
9091 environment, at level #2.
9094 \begin_layout Enumerate
9095 Notice how the nested
9099 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9103 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9107 \begin_layout Standard
9108 We ended this example by entering
9113 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9117 and reset the nesting depth by using
9120 arg "depth-decrement"
9126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9127 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9136 \begin_inset Argument 1
9139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9140 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9148 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 This is level #1, in an
9153 paragraph environment.
9154 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9169 arg "depth-increment"
9173 Now, what happens if we nest an
9177 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9178 label be? An asterisk?
9182 \begin_layout Itemize
9192 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9193 So, its label is a bullet.
9194 (We got here by using
9197 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9203 arg "depth-increment"
9206 , then changing the environment to
9214 \begin_layout Itemize
9215 Here's level #4, produced using
9218 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9224 arg "depth-increment"
9228 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9233 \begin_layout Enumerate
9234 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9236 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9241 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9245 , because we are in the
9253 environment (that is, it is an
9268 \begin_layout Enumerate
9273 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9274 type of numbering does LyX use?
9277 \begin_layout Enumerate
9278 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9281 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9284 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9287 \begin_layout Enumerate
9291 arg "depth-decrement"
9294 to decrease the depth after the next
9297 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9310 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9313 numeral as the label.Why?
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9326 Notice, however, that LyX
9330 reset the counter for the label.
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9344 arg "depth-decrement"
9347 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9348 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9349 into the twofold-nested
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 The same thing happens if we do another
9361 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9367 arg "depth-decrement"
9370 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9373 \begin_layout Standard
9374 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9379 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9393 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9399 The same rule applies for the
9403 environment, as well.
9406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9407 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9410 \begin_layout Enumerate
9411 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9412 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9413 the same detail with how we did it.
9422 \begin_layout Standard
9430 arg "depth-increment"
9437 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9438 the example in parentheses someplace.
9439 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9440 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9441 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9450 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9455 Now we will add verse.
9456 \begin_inset Newline newline
9459 It will get much worse.
9460 \begin_inset Newline newline
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9481 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9482 \begin_inset Newline newline
9485 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9486 \begin_inset Newline newline
9492 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9505 \begin_layout Standard
9506 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9514 \begin_inset Tabular
9515 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9516 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9517 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9518 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9607 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9617 arg "depth-increment"
9623 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9640 \begin_layout Enumerate
9645 : level #1) This is another item.
9646 Note that selecting a
9650 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9651 3 times to put the table inside the
9659 \begin_layout Quotation
9660 We're now ending the
9664 list and changing to
9669 We're still at level #1.
9670 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9671 The next set of paragraphs is a
9672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9679 We will nest both the
9686 \begin_inset space ~
9691 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9695 for the letter body.
9699 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9702 to preserve the depth.
9703 Remember that you need to use
9706 arg "newline-insert newline"
9709 to create multiple lines inside the
9716 \begin_inset space ~
9726 \begin_layout Right Address
9728 \begin_inset Newline newline
9731 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9732 \begin_inset Newline newline
9738 \begin_layout Address
9740 \begin_inset space ~
9746 \begin_layout Quotation
9747 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9751 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9752 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9753 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9754 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9755 as soon as possible.
9756 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9759 \begin_layout Quotation
9760 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9761 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9762 with your order, along with payment.
9765 \begin_layout Quotation
9766 We thank you again for your patience.
9769 \begin_layout Address
9771 \begin_inset Newline newline
9778 \begin_layout Quotation
9779 That ends that example!
9782 \begin_layout Standard
9783 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9784 just a few keystrokes.
9785 We could have easily nested an
9806 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9809 \begin_layout Section
9810 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9811 \begin_inset Index idx
9814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9823 \begin_layout Standard
9824 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9825 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9826 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
9827 be broken at the end of a line.
9828 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9832 \begin_layout Subsection
9834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9836 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9841 \begin_inset Index idx
9844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9853 \begin_layout Standard
9854 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9856 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9860 Further documentation is given in section
9861 \begin_inset Newline newline
9865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9867 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9875 \begin_layout Standard
9876 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9891 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9900 A protected space is set with
9902 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9903 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9905 \begin_inset space ~
9913 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
9919 \begin_layout Subsection
9921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9923 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
9928 \begin_inset Index idx
9931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9932 Spacing ! Horizontal
9940 \begin_layout Standard
9941 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
9943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9944 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9948 The length units are listed in Appendix
9949 \begin_inset space ~
9953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9955 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
9962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9966 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
9971 \begin_inset Index idx
9974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9983 \begin_layout Standard
9984 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
9985 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
9986 at the ends of sentences.
9987 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
9988 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
9989 followed by a period; see section
9990 \begin_inset space ~
9994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9996 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10001 To insert a normal space, select
10003 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10004 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10006 \begin_inset space ~
10014 arg "space-insert normal"
10020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10024 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10029 \begin_inset Index idx
10032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10041 \begin_layout Standard
10043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10050 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10059 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10060 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10061 inside abbreviations:
10064 \begin_layout Quote
10066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10070 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10073 \begin_layout Standard
10074 or between values and units.
10075 Compare for example this:
10076 \begin_inset Newline newline
10080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 10 kg (normal space
10090 \begin_layout Standard
10091 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10093 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10094 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10096 \begin_inset space ~
10104 arg "space-insert thin"
10110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10114 \begin_layout Standard
10115 You can also insert the following space types:
10118 \begin_layout Description
10120 \begin_inset space ~
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10127 space A line with a
10128 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10132 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10136 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10139 negative thin space between the arrows.
10142 \begin_layout Description
10144 \begin_inset space ~
10148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10152 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10156 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10160 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10164 \begin_inset space ~
10168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10171 em) space between the arrows.
10174 \begin_layout Description
10176 \begin_inset space ~
10180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10184 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10188 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10192 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10196 \begin_inset space ~
10200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10203 em) space between the arrows.
10206 \begin_layout Description
10208 \begin_inset space ~
10212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10216 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10220 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10224 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10228 \begin_inset space ~
10232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10235 em) space between the arrows.
10238 \begin_layout Description
10240 \begin_inset space ~
10244 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10248 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10253 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10260 cm space between the arrows.
10263 \begin_layout Standard
10265 \begin_inset space ~
10269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10271 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10275 lists the different space sizes.
10278 \begin_layout Standard
10279 \begin_inset Float table
10284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10286 \begin_inset Caption
10288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10291 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10295 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10305 \begin_inset Tabular
10306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10307 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10532 \begin_inset Index idx
10535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10544 \begin_layout Standard
10545 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10546 in a uniform fashion.
10547 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10548 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10549 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10550 equally between themselves.
10553 \begin_layout Standard
10554 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10557 \begin_layout Quote
10559 This is on the left side
10560 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10563 This is on the right
10566 \begin_layout Quote
10569 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10573 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10579 \begin_layout Quote
10582 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10586 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10590 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10596 \begin_layout Standard
10597 That was an example in the
10603 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10611 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10614 is one in a standard paragraph.
10615 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10619 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10622 \begin_layout Standard
10623 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10626 \begin_inset space ~
10631 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10634 \begin_layout Standard
10636 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10640 \begin_inset space ~
10646 \begin_layout Standard
10648 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10652 \begin_inset space ~
10658 \begin_layout Standard
10660 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10664 \begin_inset space ~
10670 \begin_layout Standard
10672 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10676 \begin_inset space ~
10682 \begin_layout Standard
10684 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10688 \begin_inset space ~
10694 \begin_layout Standard
10696 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10700 \begin_inset space ~
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10715 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10719 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10720 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10721 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10725 option in the space dialog.
10733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10737 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10742 \begin_inset Index idx
10745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10754 \begin_layout Standard
10755 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10756 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10759 \begin_layout Standard
10760 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10763 What is correct English?:
10764 \begin_inset Newline newline
10768 \begin_inset Newline newline
10772 \begin_inset space ~
10775 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10776 \begin_inset Newline newline
10780 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10791 \begin_inset Newline newline
10795 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10812 \begin_layout Standard
10814 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset space ~
10823 \begin_inset space ~
10827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10831 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10833 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10834 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10838 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10844 \begin_inset space ~
10848 \begin_inset space ~
10852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10855 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10864 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10865 That is why it is named
10866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10874 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10875 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10879 \begin_layout Subsection
10881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10883 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10888 \begin_inset Index idx
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10900 \begin_layout Standard
10901 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10903 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10904 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10906 \begin_inset space ~
10912 There you find the following sizes:
10915 \begin_layout Standard
10928 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
10933 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
10935 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10936 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10938 \begin_inset space ~
10944 \begin_inset Index idx
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10948 Document ! Settings
10953 for the paragraph separation.
10954 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
10965 \begin_layout Standard
10971 \begin_inset Index idx
10974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10980 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
10981 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
10986 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
10987 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
10996 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 s are described in section
11006 \begin_inset space ~
11010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11012 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11021 If there are several
11025 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11026 You can therefore use
11030 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11033 \begin_layout Standard
11038 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11045 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11063 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11064 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11076 \begin_layout Subsection
11077 Paragraph Alignment
11078 \begin_inset Index idx
11081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 Paragraph ! Alignment
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11093 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11096 dialog (toolbar button
11099 arg "layout-paragraph"
11103 There are five possibilities:
11106 \begin_layout Itemize
11114 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11120 \begin_layout Itemize
11128 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11134 \begin_layout Itemize
11142 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11148 \begin_layout Itemize
11156 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11162 \begin_layout Itemize
11170 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11176 \begin_layout Standard
11177 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11178 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11179 the left and right margins.
11180 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11183 \begin_layout Standard
11185 This paragraph is right aligned,
11188 \begin_layout Standard
11190 this one is centered,
11193 \begin_layout Standard
11195 this one is left aligned.
11198 \begin_layout Subsection
11200 \begin_inset Index idx
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 Page breaks ! Forced
11210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11212 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11219 \begin_layout Standard
11220 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11221 can force a page break where you want one.
11222 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11223 Only if you use a lot of
11227 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11230 \begin_layout Standard
11231 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11232 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11236 have to change the page breaking.
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11240 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11242 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11244 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11245 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11247 \begin_inset space ~
11253 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11255 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11256 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11258 \begin_inset space ~
11263 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11265 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11266 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11269 \begin_layout Standard
11270 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11271 at the top of a page.
11272 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11273 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11274 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11275 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11279 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11283 to learn more about
11290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11294 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11299 \begin_inset Index idx
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 Page breaks ! Clear
11311 \begin_layout Standard
11312 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11313 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11314 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11315 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11316 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11320 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11322 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11323 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11325 \begin_inset space ~
11331 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11333 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11334 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11336 \begin_inset space ~
11340 \begin_inset space ~
11345 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11346 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11349 \begin_layout Subsection
11351 \begin_inset Index idx
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11363 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11370 \begin_layout Standard
11371 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11373 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11375 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11376 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11378 \begin_inset space ~
11382 \begin_inset space ~
11390 arg "newline-insert newline"
11394 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11396 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11397 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11399 \begin_inset space ~
11403 \begin_inset space ~
11411 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11414 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11416 This is useful to avoid
11417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11424 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11427 \begin_layout Standard
11428 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11429 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11430 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11431 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11432 \begin_inset space ~
11436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11438 reference "sec:Quote"
11443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11445 reference "sec:Verse"
11450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11452 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11459 \begin_layout Subsection
11461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11463 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11468 \begin_inset Index idx
11471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11480 \begin_layout Standard
11482 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11493 \begin_layout Standard
11497 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11498 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11500 \begin_inset space ~
11505 you can insert horizontal lines.
11506 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11507 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11508 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11524 \begin_layout Section
11525 Characters and Symbols
11528 \begin_layout Standard
11529 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11530 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11531 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11539 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11543 for information on how this is done.
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11547 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11552 dialog via the menu
11554 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11555 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11570 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11571 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11572 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11580 \begin_layout Section
11581 Fonts and Text Styles
11582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11584 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11591 \begin_layout Subsection
11593 \begin_inset Index idx
11596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11605 \begin_layout Standard
11606 There are two types of fonts:
11609 \begin_layout Description
11611 \begin_inset space ~
11615 \begin_inset Index idx
11618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11624 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11629 characters) in the font.
11630 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11631 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11632 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11633 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11634 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11635 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11636 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11637 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11641 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11642 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11643 sizes than at small ones.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11658 \begin_inset space ~
11666 \begin_layout Description
11668 \begin_inset space ~
11672 \begin_inset Index idx
11675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11681 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11682 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11683 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11684 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11685 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11686 image manipulation program.
11687 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11688 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11692 pixels high up to 34
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11696 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11697 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11698 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11700 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11701 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11702 \begin_inset Newline newline
11705 Bitmap fonts are named
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11713 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11717 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11718 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11719 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11720 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11721 use scalable fonts.
11724 \begin_layout Standard
11725 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11728 \begin_layout Standard
11729 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11730 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11731 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11732 font to emphasize text, you use an
11733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11741 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11742 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11746 \begin_layout Subsection
11748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11750 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11758 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11759 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11760 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11762 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11763 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11764 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
11765 to a word processor.
11766 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11767 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11768 across different machines.
11769 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
11770 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
11772 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11780 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11785 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
11786 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11790 \begin_layout Standard
11791 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
11792 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
11794 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11795 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
11796 that is installed on your system.
11797 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11800 \begin_layout Standard
11801 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11809 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11810 es; so you might have to experiment.
11818 \begin_layout Standard
11819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11827 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11828 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11836 \begin_layout Subsection
11837 Document Font and Font size
11838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11840 name "sub:Document-Font"
11845 \begin_inset Index idx
11848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11855 \begin_inset Index idx
11858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_layout Standard
11868 You can set the document fonts in the
11870 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11874 \begin_inset Index idx
11877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11878 Document ! Settings
11888 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11889 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11901 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
11902 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
11903 with the roman font.
11906 \begin_layout Standard
11913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
11923 This requires that you use
11929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11968 as the output format, i.
11969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11973 \begin_inset space \space{}
11976 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
11977 \begin_inset space ~
11981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11983 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11988 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
11989 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
11991 \begin_inset space ~
11994 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
11995 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
11996 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
11998 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12001 \begin_layout Standard
12002 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12007 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12012 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12013 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12020 \begin_inset space ~
12026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12039 European Computer Modern
12042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12049 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12061 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12062 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12067 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12075 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12081 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12082 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12085 \begin_layout Itemize
12089 \begin_inset space ~
12094 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12107 \begin_inset space ~
12112 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12116 as the default font.
12117 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12118 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12121 \begin_inset space ~
12134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12135 One difference is improved kerning.
12143 \begin_layout Itemize
12147 \begin_inset space ~
12151 \begin_inset space ~
12156 fonts in (the rare) case that
12159 \begin_inset space ~
12164 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12179 Virtual means that it
12180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12191 -glyphs from other fonts.
12192 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12214 Loading the LaTeX-package
12219 \begin_inset Index idx
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12223 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12228 with the document preamble line
12229 \begin_inset Newline newline
12236 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12237 \begin_inset Newline newline
12242 will fix the guillemet problem.
12247 and that accented characters are not
12251 glyph, but built of
12255 characters, the accent and the letter.
12256 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12262 If you search for example for the French word
12263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12270 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12279 and not for the glyph
12280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12284 \begin_inset space ~
12288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12294 \begin_layout Itemize
12295 If you do not like the look of
12303 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12308 \begin_inset space ~
12314 \begin_inset space ~
12324 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12325 \begin_inset space ~
12328 serif and typewriter fonts,
12332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12333 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12340 \begin_inset space ~
12349 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12354 \begin_inset space \space{}
12362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12366 \begin_inset space \space{}
12372 \begin_inset space ~
12380 \begin_inset space ~
12390 but you can also select your own.
12391 \begin_inset Newline newline
12394 The differences between roman,
12397 \begin_inset space ~
12406 fonts are explained in section
12407 \begin_inset space ~
12411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12413 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12418 \begin_inset Newline newline
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12429 was originally designed for newspapers.
12430 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12431 into the small newspaper columns.
12435 \begin_inset space ~
12440 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12443 \begin_layout Standard
12444 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12457 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12462 depends on the class you are using.
12463 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12466 \begin_layout Standard
12467 Note that the font size is the
12472 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12473 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12474 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12483 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12490 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12497 \begin_layout Standard
12501 \begin_inset space ~
12506 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12511 serif or typewriter.
12516 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12526 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12529 \begin_layout Standard
12538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12547 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12553 \begin_inset Index idx
12556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12569 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12574 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12575 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12585 Use Old Style Figures
12589 Use True Small Caps
12592 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12595 Use Old Style Figures
12597 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12599 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12607 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12611 Use True Small Caps
12613 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12614 of scaled capitals.
12615 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12616 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12619 \begin_layout Standard
12624 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12625 a font to display the script characters.
12629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12630 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12635 \begin_inset Index idx
12638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12639 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12644 So this has no effect for the document language
12658 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12670 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12674 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12675 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12676 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12678 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12681 dialog, see section
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12688 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12700 \begin_layout Subsection
12701 Using Different Character Styles
12702 \begin_inset Index idx
12705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 \begin_layout Standard
12725 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12726 certain paragraph environments.
12727 LyX supports two character styles,
12736 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12740 \begin_layout Standard
12745 style, do one of the following:
12748 \begin_layout Itemize
12749 click on the toolbar button
12758 \begin_layout Itemize
12759 use the key binding
12768 \begin_layout Standard
12769 These commands are all toggles.
12774 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12777 \begin_layout Standard
12778 One typically uses the
12782 style for proper names.
12784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12791 is the original author of LyX.
12792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12798 \begin_layout Standard
12799 A more widely used character style is the
12804 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12811 \begin_layout Itemize
12812 clicking on the toolbar button
12821 \begin_layout Itemize
12822 using the keybindings
12831 \begin_layout Standard
12836 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12837 es use a different font.
12840 \begin_layout Standard
12841 We've been using the
12845 style all over the place in this document.
12846 Here's one more example:
12849 \begin_layout Quotation
12852 Do not overuse character styles!
12855 \begin_layout Standard
12856 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12857 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12858 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12859 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
12863 \begin_layout Standard
12864 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12872 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12874 \begin_inset space ~
12877 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12883 arg "dialog-show character"
12889 \begin_layout Subsection
12890 Fine-Tuning with the
12895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12897 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12902 \begin_inset Index idx
12905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12914 \begin_layout Standard
12915 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
12916 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12917 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12918 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12919 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12920 from ordinary dialog.
12923 \begin_layout Standard
12924 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12925 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12926 \begin_inset Newline newline
12929 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
12930 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12933 \begin_layout Standard
12934 To use custom character styles, open the
12936 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12941 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12944 dialog or press the toolbar button
12947 arg "dialog-show character"
12951 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
12952 font property that you can choose.
12953 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
12956 \begin_inset space ~
12961 , which keeps the current state of that property.
12966 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
12967 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
12968 environments all at once.
12971 \begin_layout Standard
12972 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12987 \begin_layout Labeling
12988 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
12994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13002 The possible options are:
13006 \begin_layout Labeling
13007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13012 This is the Roman font family.
13013 Normally a serif font.
13014 It's also the default family.
13024 \begin_layout Labeling
13025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13029 \begin_inset space ~
13036 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13048 \begin_layout Labeling
13049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13056 This is the Typewriter font family.
13062 arg "font-typewriter"
13071 \begin_layout Labeling
13072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13077 This corresponds to the print weight.
13082 \begin_layout Labeling
13083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13088 This is the Medium font series.
13089 It's also the default series.
13092 \begin_layout Labeling
13093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13100 This is the Bold font series.
13113 \begin_layout Labeling
13114 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13119 As the name implies.
13124 \begin_layout Labeling
13125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13130 This is the Upright font shape.
13131 It's also the default shape.
13134 \begin_layout Labeling
13135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13149 s the Italic font shape
13155 \begin_layout Labeling
13156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13163 This is the Slanted font shape
13165 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13168 \begin_layout Labeling
13169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13180 This is the Small caps font shape
13187 \begin_layout Labeling
13188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13193 Alters the text color.
13194 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13203 , which means that the document default color set in
13205 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13206 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13217 is used, you can choose between
13250 \begin_inset Index idx
13253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13262 \begin_layout Labeling
13263 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13268 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13269 the language of the document.
13270 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13272 \begin_inset Newline newline
13275 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13276 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13277 When using the spell checking (see section
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13284 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13288 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13291 \begin_layout Labeling
13292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13297 Alters the size of the font.
13298 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13299 proportional to the document font size.
13300 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13301 what you want to do.
13306 \begin_layout Labeling
13307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13328 arg "font-size tiny"
13334 \begin_layout Labeling
13335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13356 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13362 \begin_layout Labeling
13363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13384 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13390 \begin_layout Labeling
13391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13412 arg "font-size small"
13418 \begin_layout Labeling
13419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13433 It's also the default size.
13437 arg "font-size normal"
13443 \begin_layout Labeling
13444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13465 arg "font-size large"
13471 \begin_layout Labeling
13472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13493 arg "font-size larger"
13499 \begin_layout Labeling
13500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13521 arg "font-size largest"
13527 \begin_layout Labeling
13528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13549 arg "font-size huge"
13555 \begin_layout Labeling
13556 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13577 arg "font-size giant"
13583 \begin_layout Labeling
13584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13589 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13609 arg "font-size increase"
13615 \begin_layout Labeling
13616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13621 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13641 arg "font-size decrease"
13648 \begin_layout Standard
13653 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13654 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13655 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13656 — use those instead.
13657 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13660 \begin_layout Labeling
13661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13666 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13671 \begin_layout Labeling
13672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13679 This is text with emphasize on
13682 This might seem like the same as
13686 , but it is actually a bit different.
13692 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13694 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13697 \begin_layout Labeling
13698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13705 This is text with Underbar on.
13711 arg "font-underline"
13717 \begin_inset Newline newline
13722 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13723 when you could not change fonts.
13724 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13725 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13729 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13732 \begin_layout Labeling
13733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13737 \begin_inset space ~
13744 This is text with Double underbar on.
13750 arg "font-underunderline"
13754 \begin_inset Newline newline
13757 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13758 about double underbar.
13761 \begin_layout Labeling
13762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13766 \begin_inset space ~
13773 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13779 arg "font-underwave"
13783 \begin_inset Newline newline
13786 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13787 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13790 \begin_layout Labeling
13791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13798 This is text with Strikeout on.
13804 arg "font-strikeout"
13808 \begin_inset Newline newline
13811 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13812 changed in the meantime.
13815 \begin_layout Labeling
13816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13823 This is text with Noun on.
13830 , this is a logical attribute.
13831 Normally it's equivalent to
13834 \begin_inset space ~
13843 \begin_layout Standard
13844 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13845 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
13847 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13849 \begin_inset space ~
13852 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13858 arg "dialog-show character"
13861 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
13862 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13865 arg "textstyle-apply"
13869 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13873 \begin_layout Standard
13874 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13881 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13882 (suppose you just set the shape to
13883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13901 \begin_inset space ~
13913 \begin_layout Standard
13914 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13922 \begin_inset space ~
13934 \begin_layout Itemize
13940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13947 font, which means every character has the same width; the
13948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13965 \begin_inset Newline newline
13969 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13983 \begin_inset Note Note
13986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13987 For more on phantoms see section
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13994 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14004 \begin_inset Newline newline
14010 \begin_layout Itemize
14015 fonts use characters with serifs.
14016 These are the small
14017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14024 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14025 The following example shows the difference:
14026 \begin_inset Newline newline
14030 \begin_inset Newline newline
14035 text without serifs
14038 \begin_inset Newline newline
14041 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14042 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14049 \begin_layout Itemize
14054 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14055 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14056 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14059 \begin_layout Standard
14060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14067 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14068 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14071 \begin_inset space ~
14076 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14077 the property to be removed.
14078 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14079 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14080 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14098 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14099 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14107 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14111 \begin_inset space ~
14116 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14127 If you, for example, set
14128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14146 \begin_inset space ~
14151 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14160 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14163 \begin_layout Standard
14164 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14165 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14168 \begin_layout Section
14169 Printing and Previewing
14172 \begin_layout Subsection
14176 \begin_layout Standard
14177 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14178 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14179 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14180 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14181 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14183 Additional Features
14188 \begin_layout Standard
14189 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14190 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14191 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14192 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14193 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14194 This happens in two stages:
14197 \begin_layout Enumerate
14198 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14199 generating a file with the extension,
14200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14214 \begin_layout Enumerate
14215 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14219 file to produce printable output.
14222 \begin_layout Subsection
14223 Output file formats
14224 \begin_inset Index idx
14227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14236 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14244 Simple text (ASCII)
14245 \begin_inset Index idx
14248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14249 File formats ! ASCII
14257 \begin_layout Standard
14258 This file type has the extension
14259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14271 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14275 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14282 \begin_layout Standard
14283 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14285 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14286 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14288 \begin_inset space ~
14294 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14295 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14296 \begin_inset space ~
14300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14302 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14307 If your document includes such material, use
14309 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14310 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14312 \begin_inset space ~
14316 \begin_inset space ~
14320 \begin_inset space ~
14328 \begin_inset space ~
14332 \begin_inset space ~
14338 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14339 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14342 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14344 \begin_inset Index idx
14347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14348 File formats ! LaTeX
14356 \begin_layout Standard
14357 This file type has the extension
14358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14369 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14371 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14372 it manually with console commands.
14373 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14374 you view or export your document.
14377 \begin_layout Standard
14378 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14380 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14381 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14396 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14397 \begin_inset space ~
14401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14403 reference "sub:Export"
14410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14412 \begin_inset Index idx
14415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14424 \begin_layout Standard
14425 This file type has the extension
14426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14446 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14447 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14448 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14452 \begin_layout Standard
14453 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14454 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14455 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14456 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14457 when you view the DVI.
14458 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14461 \begin_layout Standard
14462 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14464 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14465 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14470 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14471 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14473 \begin_inset space ~
14480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14490 The latter option uses the program
14499 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14500 font access (see section
14501 \begin_inset space ~
14505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14507 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14512 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14513 standard TeX processor.
14516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14518 \begin_inset Index idx
14521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14522 File formats ! PostScript
14530 \begin_layout Standard
14531 This file type has the extension
14532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14544 PostScript was developed by the company
14548 as a printer language.
14549 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14551 PostScript can be seen as a
14552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14555 programming language
14556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14559 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14564 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14570 \begin_inset Index idx
14573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14574 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14584 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14587 \begin_layout Standard
14588 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14592 Encapsulated PostScript
14593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14596 (EPS, file extension
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14609 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14610 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14611 If, for example, you have 50
14612 \begin_inset space ~
14615 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14616 \begin_inset space ~
14619 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14620 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14621 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14622 EPS to avoid this problem.
14625 \begin_layout Standard
14626 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14628 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14629 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14637 \begin_inset Index idx
14640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14647 \begin_inset Index idx
14650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14659 \begin_layout Standard
14660 This file type has the extension
14661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14677 Portable Document Format
14678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14685 was derived from PostScript.
14686 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14695 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14696 looks exactly the same.
14699 \begin_layout Standard
14700 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14704 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14708 (JPG, file extension
14709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14736 Portable Network Graphics
14737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14740 (PNG, file extension
14741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14753 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14754 background to one of these formats.
14755 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14756 will slow down your workflow.
14757 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
14760 \begin_layout Standard
14761 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14763 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14769 \begin_layout Description
14771 \begin_inset space ~
14774 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14778 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14781 \begin_layout Description
14783 \begin_inset space ~
14790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14797 X) This uses the program
14801 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14806 is a new engine, derived from
14810 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14811 access (see section
14812 \begin_inset space ~
14816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14818 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14823 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14824 standard TeX processor.
14827 \begin_layout Description
14829 \begin_inset space ~
14836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14843 X) This uses the program
14847 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14852 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14853 font access (see section
14854 \begin_inset space ~
14858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14860 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14865 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
14866 vertically written Japanese.
14869 \begin_layout Description
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14874 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14878 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14882 \begin_layout Description
14884 \begin_inset space ~
14887 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14891 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14892 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14896 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14897 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
14900 \begin_layout Standard
14904 \begin_inset space ~
14913 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14914 works without problems.
14915 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14916 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
14920 \begin_inset space ~
14927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14939 \begin_inset space ~
14946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14955 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
14963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14965 \begin_inset Index idx
14968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14969 FileFormats ! XHTML
14975 \begin_inset Index idx
14978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14987 \begin_layout Standard
14988 This file type has the extension
14989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15001 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15002 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15003 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15004 suitable for the purpose.
15005 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15007 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15008 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15011 between different formats, which are described in section
15013 Math Output in XHTML
15018 \begin_inset space ~
15026 \begin_layout Standard
15027 XHTML output remains
15028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15035 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15038 LyX and the World Wide Web
15042 Additional Features
15044 manual, for more information.
15047 \begin_layout Standard
15048 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15050 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15051 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15057 \begin_layout Subsection
15059 \begin_inset Index idx
15062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15071 \begin_layout Standard
15072 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15073 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15088 or use the toolbar button
15095 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15096 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15103 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15107 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15115 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15120 Further output formats can be selected via
15122 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15123 View (Other Formats)
15125 or the toolbar button
15126 \begin_inset Graphics
15127 filename ../images/view-others.png
15129 groupId toolbarbuttons
15136 \begin_layout Standard
15137 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15138 viewer window using the menu
15140 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15145 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15146 Update (Other Formats)
15151 \begin_layout Standard
15152 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15154 To have a real output, export your document.
15157 \begin_layout Subsection
15158 Printing the File from within LyX
15159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15161 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15168 \begin_layout Standard
15169 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15170 it directly from within LyX.
15171 To print a file, select the menu
15173 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15179 arg "dialog-show print"
15182 ) or click on the toolbar button
15185 arg "dialog-show print"
15189 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15190 This file is then processed by the program
15194 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15199 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15202 \begin_layout Standard
15203 You can set the following print parameters in the
15206 \begin_inset space ~
15214 \begin_layout Labeling
15215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15220 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15225 Note that this printer name is for the program
15234 has to be configured for this printer name.
15235 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15236 \begin_inset space ~
15240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15242 reference "sub:Printer"
15251 The printer should understand PostScript.
15254 \begin_layout Labeling
15255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15260 The name of a file to print to.
15261 The output will be a PostScript file.
15262 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15266 \begin_layout Standard
15267 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15268 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15269 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15270 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15271 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15272 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15273 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15276 \begin_layout Section
15277 A few Words about Typography
15278 \begin_inset Index idx
15281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15290 \begin_layout Subsection
15291 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15292 \begin_inset Index idx
15295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15302 \begin_inset Index idx
15305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15314 \begin_layout Standard
15316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15327 character comes in four lengths: the
15339 , and the minus sign:
15340 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15346 \begin_layout Standard
15347 \begin_inset Tabular
15348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15349 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15350 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15351 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15352 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15353 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15422 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15447 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15449 \begin_inset space ~
15452 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15459 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15484 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15486 \begin_inset space ~
15489 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15510 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15544 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15550 \begin_layout Standard
15551 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15563 character multiple times in a row.
15564 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15565 the final output, but not in LyX.
15567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15597 \begin_layout Standard
15598 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15599 math mode and has a length of its own.
15600 Here are some examples:
15603 \begin_layout Enumerate
15604 line- and page-breaks
15605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15615 \begin_layout Enumerate
15617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15627 \begin_layout Enumerate
15628 Oh — there's a dash.
15629 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15639 \begin_layout Enumerate
15640 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15644 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15654 \begin_layout Subsection
15656 \begin_inset Index idx
15659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15668 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15675 \begin_layout Standard
15676 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15677 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15682 \begin_inset Index idx
15685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15686 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15691 following the rules of the document language.
15694 \begin_layout Standard
15695 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15700 font and with unusual constructs, like
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15711 This is done with the menu
15713 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15714 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15716 \begin_inset space ~
15722 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15723 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15726 \begin_layout Standard
15727 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15728 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15738 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15746 as a hyphenation possibility.
15747 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15748 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15749 as described in section
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15753 Prevent Hyphenation
15754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 \begin_inset space ~
15768 \begin_layout Subsection
15770 \begin_inset Index idx
15773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15783 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15786 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15793 \begin_layout Standard
15794 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15795 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15796 LaTeX then adds the
15797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15800 appropriate amount of space.
15801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15804 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15806 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15807 gets after another word.
15810 \begin_layout Standard
15811 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15812 not work in all cases.
15814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15825 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15826 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15829 \begin_layout Standard
15830 Here are some examples of
15834 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15837 \begin_layout Itemize
15842 \begin_layout Itemize
15847 \begin_layout Standard
15848 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15851 \begin_layout Itemize
15853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15857 this is too much space!
15860 \begin_layout Itemize
15865 \begin_layout Standard
15866 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15869 \begin_layout Standard
15870 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15873 \begin_layout Enumerate
15877 \begin_inset space ~
15882 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15889 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15894 \begin_inset Index idx
15897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15898 Spaces ! inter-word
15906 \begin_layout Enumerate
15910 \begin_inset space ~
15915 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15922 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15927 \begin_inset Index idx
15930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15939 \begin_layout Enumerate
15943 \begin_inset space ~
15947 \begin_inset space ~
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15958 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15960 \begin_inset space ~
15965 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15966 This function is also bound to
15969 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15975 \begin_layout Standard
15976 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15979 \begin_layout Itemize
15981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15985 \begin_inset space \space{}
15988 this is too much space!
15991 \begin_layout Itemize
15992 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15998 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
15999 will take care of this.
16002 \begin_layout Standard
16003 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16007 \begin_inset space ~
16012 feature described in the section
16018 Additional Features
16023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16025 \begin_inset Index idx
16028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16029 Typography ! Quotes
16035 \begin_inset Index idx
16038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16071 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16072 and use a closing quote at the end.
16074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16082 The keyboard character,
16086 , generates this automatically.
16089 \begin_layout Standard
16090 You can specify what character the
16094 key produces using the submenu
16100 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16104 \begin_inset Index idx
16107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16108 Document ! Settings
16118 There are six choices:
16121 \begin_layout Labeling
16122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16145 \begin_layout Labeling
16146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16149 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16153 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16159 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16163 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16169 \begin_layout Labeling
16170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16173 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16177 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16183 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16187 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16193 \begin_layout Labeling
16194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16197 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16201 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16207 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16217 \begin_layout Labeling
16218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16221 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16225 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16231 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16235 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16241 \begin_layout Labeling
16242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16245 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16249 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16255 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16259 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16265 \begin_layout Standard
16266 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16269 arg "quote-insert single"
16275 \begin_layout Subsection
16277 \begin_inset Index idx
16280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16281 Typography ! Ligatures
16287 \begin_inset Index idx
16290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16321 name "sub:Ligatures"
16328 \begin_layout Standard
16329 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16330 print them as single characters.
16331 These groups are known as
16336 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16338 Here are the standard ligatures:
16341 \begin_layout Itemize
16345 \begin_layout Itemize
16349 \begin_layout Itemize
16353 \begin_layout Itemize
16357 \begin_layout Itemize
16361 \begin_layout Standard
16362 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16365 \begin_layout Standard
16366 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16367 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16375 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16391 To break a ligature, use
16393 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16394 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16396 \begin_inset space ~
16403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16414 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16431 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16439 \begin_layout Subsection
16441 \begin_inset Index idx
16444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16453 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16461 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16462 characters in different sizes and heights.
16463 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16464 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16484 \begin_inset Note Note
16487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16488 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16496 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16497 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16502 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16503 following proper names:
16506 \begin_layout Description
16507 LyX The name of the game, write
16508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16529 \begin_layout Description
16530 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16552 \begin_layout Description
16553 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16575 \begin_layout Description
16576 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16599 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16604 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16612 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16613 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16614 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16617 : The actual version is
16618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16625 , the previous one was
16626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16636 \begin_layout Standard
16637 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16638 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16639 In LyX this will look like
16640 \begin_inset Graphics
16641 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16647 \begin_inset Newline newline
16650 For more about TeX Code, see section
16651 \begin_inset space ~
16655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16657 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16664 \begin_layout Subsection
16666 \begin_inset Index idx
16669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16678 \begin_layout Standard
16679 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16680 space between two words.
16681 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16691 for units use the menu
16693 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16694 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16696 \begin_inset space ~
16704 arg "space-insert thin"
16710 \begin_layout Standard
16711 Here is an example to show the differences:
16714 \begin_layout Standard
16715 \begin_inset Tabular
16716 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16717 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16718 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16719 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16726 \begin_inset space ~
16730 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16742 space between number and unit
16749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16758 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16770 half space between number and unit
16783 \begin_layout Subsection
16785 \begin_inset Index idx
16788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16789 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16797 \begin_layout Standard
16798 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16800 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16801 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16802 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16803 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16804 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16805 These bits of text became known as
16816 \begin_layout Standard
16817 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16818 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16819 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16820 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16821 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16822 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
16823 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16826 \begin_layout Standard
16827 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
16828 tweak that behavior.
16829 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16830 \begin_inset space ~
16834 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16836 key "latexcompanion"
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16845 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16851 ) may have more information.
16852 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16855 \begin_layout Chapter
16856 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
16857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16859 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16866 \begin_layout Standard
16867 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16870 \begin_inset space ~
16876 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16879 \begin_layout Section
16881 \begin_inset Index idx
16884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16904 \begin_layout Description
16906 \begin_inset space ~
16909 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16910 \begin_inset Newline newline
16914 \begin_inset Note Note
16917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16918 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16926 \begin_layout Description
16927 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
16928 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16930 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16931 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16944 \begin_inset space ~
16950 \begin_inset Newline newline
16954 \begin_inset Note Comment
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16958 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
16966 \begin_layout Description
16968 \begin_inset space ~
16971 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16972 set in the document settings under
16974 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16976 \begin_inset space ~
16982 \begin_inset Newline newline
16986 \begin_inset Newline newline
16990 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16999 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17000 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17005 of a comment that appears in the output.
17011 \begin_inset Newline newline
17015 \begin_inset Newline newline
17018 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17021 \begin_layout Standard
17022 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17030 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17034 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17037 \begin_layout Section
17039 \begin_inset Index idx
17042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17051 name "sec:Footnotes"
17058 \begin_layout Standard
17059 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17062 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17065 or the toolbar button
17068 arg "footnote-insert"
17080 \begin_inset Graphics
17081 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17090 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17119 label, the box will
17123 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17124 Clicking on the box label again will close
17137 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17138 and click on the footnote
17153 \begin_layout Standard
17154 Here is an example footnote:
17162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17163 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17171 \begin_layout Standard
17172 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17173 position where the footnote box is placed.
17174 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17175 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17176 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17177 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17182 ey are described in the
17185 \begin_inset space ~
17193 \begin_layout Section
17195 \begin_inset Index idx
17198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17207 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17214 \begin_layout Standard
17215 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17216 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17218 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17220 \begin_inset space ~
17225 or the toolbar button
17228 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17254 appearing within your text.
17255 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17264 \begin_layout Standard
17265 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17269 \begin_inset Marginal
17272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17274 This is a marginal note.
17282 \begin_layout Standard
17283 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17284 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17285 pages, right on odd pages.
17288 \begin_layout Standard
17289 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17300 \begin_inset space ~
17308 \begin_layout Section
17309 Graphics and Images
17310 \begin_inset Index idx
17313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17320 \begin_inset Index idx
17323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17332 name "sec:Graphics"
17339 \begin_layout Standard
17340 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17341 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17344 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17349 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17353 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17356 \begin_layout Standard
17357 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17365 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17366 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17368 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17369 \begin_inset space ~
17373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17375 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17382 \begin_layout Standard
17387 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17388 of the image in the output.
17389 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17393 \begin_inset space ~
17397 \begin_inset space ~
17406 \begin_inset space ~
17410 \begin_inset space ~
17414 \begin_inset space ~
17419 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17420 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17428 \begin_layout Standard
17435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17443 \begin_inset space ~
17447 \begin_inset space ~
17454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17463 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17464 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17468 \begin_inset space ~
17473 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17474 with the image size is printed.
17478 \begin_inset space ~
17482 \begin_inset space ~
17486 \begin_inset space ~
17491 is explained in the
17494 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_layout Standard
17507 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17508 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17510 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17513 \begin_layout Standard
17515 \begin_inset Graphics
17516 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17524 \begin_layout Standard
17525 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17526 the image into a float, see section
17527 \begin_inset space ~
17531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17533 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17540 \begin_layout Subsection
17542 \begin_inset Index idx
17545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17554 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17561 \begin_layout Standard
17562 You can insert images in any known file format.
17563 But as we explained in section
17564 \begin_inset space ~
17568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17570 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17574 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17575 LyX therefore uses the program
17579 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17580 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17581 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17582 \begin_inset space ~
17586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17588 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17595 \begin_layout Standard
17596 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17599 \begin_layout Description
17601 \begin_inset space ~
17604 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17605 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17606 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17610 Graphics Interchange Format
17611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17614 (GIF, file extension
17615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17627 \begin_inset Index idx
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17662 Portable Network Graphics
17663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17666 (PNG, file extension
17667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17679 \begin_inset Index idx
17682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17714 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17718 (JPG, file extension
17719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17743 \begin_inset Index idx
17746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17777 \begin_layout Description
17779 \begin_inset space ~
17782 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17784 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17785 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17786 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17787 \begin_inset Newline newline
17790 Scalable image formats can be
17791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17794 Scalable Vector Graphics
17795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17798 (SVG, file extension
17799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17811 \begin_inset Index idx
17814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17846 Encapsulated PostScript
17847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17850 (EPS, file extension
17851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17863 \begin_inset Index idx
17866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 Portable Document Format
17899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17902 (PDF, file extension
17903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17915 \begin_inset Index idx
17918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17933 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
17934 result will not be scalable.
17935 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17941 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17949 \begin_layout Standard
17950 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
17957 \begin_layout Subsection
17958 Grouping of Image Settings
17959 \begin_inset Index idx
17962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17963 Images ! Settings grouping
17971 \begin_layout Standard
17972 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17974 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17975 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17977 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17978 need to manually change each of them.
17982 \begin_layout Standard
17983 A new group can be set by pressing the button
17986 \begin_inset space ~
17990 \begin_inset space ~
18005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18013 \begin_inset space ~
18017 \begin_inset space ~
18024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18034 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18035 and checking the name of the desired group.
18038 \begin_layout Section
18040 \begin_inset Index idx
18043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18059 \begin_layout Standard
18060 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18063 arg "tabular-insert"
18068 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18072 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18073 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18074 from the rest of the table.
18075 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18076 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18078 Here is an example table:
18081 \begin_layout Standard
18083 \begin_inset Tabular
18084 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18085 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18088 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18289 \begin_layout Subsection
18293 \begin_layout Standard
18294 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18297 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18301 This brings up the table dialog.
18302 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18303 cursor is placed currently.
18304 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18305 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18306 done on all of your selection.
18309 \begin_layout Standard
18310 In addition to the table dialog, the
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18318 helps you in setting table properties.
18319 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18322 \begin_layout Standard
18326 \begin_inset space ~
18331 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18332 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18333 current cell respectively.
18334 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18336 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18337 of text, see section
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18344 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18351 \begin_layout Standard
18352 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18353 using the check box
18362 This will merge the cells to
18366 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18367 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18368 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18369 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18370 in the last row without the upper border:
18373 \begin_layout Standard
18375 \begin_inset Tabular
18376 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18377 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18378 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18379 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="0">
18380 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18381 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18401 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18477 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18512 \begin_layout Standard
18513 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18514 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18515 explained in the chapter
18522 \begin_inset space ~
18528 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18532 degrees counterclockwise.
18533 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18536 \begin_layout Standard
18537 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 Most DVI-viewers are
18549 able to display rotations.
18557 \begin_layout Standard
18562 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18567 adds lines for all cell borders.
18570 \begin_layout Subsection
18572 \begin_inset Index idx
18575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18576 Tables ! Longtables
18582 \begin_inset Index idx
18585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 \begin_layout Standard
18595 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18598 \begin_inset space ~
18602 \begin_inset space ~
18611 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18612 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18615 \begin_layout Description
18620 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18621 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18622 except for the first page, if
18625 \begin_inset space ~
18633 \begin_layout Description
18637 \begin_inset space ~
18642 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18643 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18646 \begin_layout Description
18651 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18652 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18653 except for the last page, if
18656 \begin_inset space ~
18664 \begin_layout Description
18668 \begin_inset space ~
18673 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18674 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18677 \begin_layout Description
18678 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18679 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18681 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18685 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18688 \begin_inset space ~
18696 \begin_layout Standard
18697 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18698 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18699 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18705 In this context, first means first in this order:
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18720 \begin_inset space ~
18725 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18728 \begin_layout Standard
18730 \begin_inset Tabular
18731 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18732 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18733 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18734 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18735 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18736 <row endfirsthead="true">
18737 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18748 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18757 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 <row endfirsthead="true">
18768 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18788 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18800 <row endhead="true">
18801 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <row endhead="true">
18832 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18843 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18852 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 <row endfoot="true">
18865 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18876 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18916 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20537 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20568 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20599 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20846 <row endlastfoot="true">
20847 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 \begin_layout Subsection
20886 \begin_inset Index idx
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20898 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20905 \begin_layout Standard
20906 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20907 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20908 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20909 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20913 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20916 \begin_layout Standard
20917 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20918 for the column in the table dialog.
20919 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20920 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20924 \begin_layout Standard
20926 \begin_inset Tabular
20927 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20928 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20929 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20930 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20931 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 This is longer now.
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21133 This is longer now.
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 \begin_layout Standard
21165 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21166 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21172 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21178 Selection with the mouse or with
21182 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21183 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21184 the selection from outside the table.
21187 \begin_layout Section
21189 \begin_inset Index idx
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21208 \begin_layout Subsection
21212 \begin_layout Standard
21213 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21214 have a fixed location.
21216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21223 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21231 \begin_inset space ~
21236 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21237 too many notes on the current page.
21240 \begin_layout Standard
21241 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21242 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21243 and pages without text.
21244 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21245 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21246 Floats are therefore numbered.
21247 Referencing is described in section
21248 \begin_inset space ~
21252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21254 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21261 \begin_layout Standard
21262 To insert a float, use the menu
21264 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21268 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21269 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21271 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21272 \begin_inset Index idx
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21282 paragraph within the float.
21283 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21284 by left-clicking on the box label.
21285 A closed float box looks like this:
21286 \begin_inset Graphics
21287 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21292 – a gray button with a red label.
21295 \begin_layout Standard
21296 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21297 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21300 \begin_layout Subsection
21304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21308 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21313 \begin_inset Index idx
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 Floats ! Figure floats
21325 \begin_layout Standard
21327 \begin_inset space ~
21331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21333 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21337 was created using the menu
21339 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21340 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21346 arg "float-insert figure"
21350 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21353 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21359 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21363 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21364 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21366 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21368 \begin_inset space ~
21376 arg "layout-paragraph"
21382 \begin_layout Standard
21383 \begin_inset Float figure
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 \begin_inset Graphics
21391 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21406 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21410 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21423 \begin_layout Standard
21424 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21425 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21427 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21436 ) and refer to it using the menu
21438 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21444 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21448 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21449 vague references like
21450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21457 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21467 For more about cross-references, see section
21468 \begin_inset space ~
21472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21474 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21481 \begin_layout Standard
21482 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21483 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21484 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21485 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21486 as described in section
21487 \begin_inset space ~
21491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21493 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21499 \begin_inset space ~
21503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21505 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21509 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21510 You can also set the images one below the other.
21512 \begin_inset space ~
21516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21518 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21525 reference "fig:Platypus"
21529 are the subfigures.
21532 \begin_layout Standard
21533 \begin_inset Float figure
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21543 \begin_inset Float figure
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21554 name "fig:Undefinable"
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 \begin_inset Graphics
21568 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21579 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21583 \begin_inset Float figure
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21594 name "fig:Platypus"
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 \begin_inset Graphics
21608 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21620 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21632 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21636 Two distorted images.
21649 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21651 \begin_inset Index idx
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21655 Floats ! Table floats
21663 \begin_layout Standard
21664 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21666 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21667 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21670 or the toolbar button
21673 arg "float-insert table"
21677 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21678 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21679 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21681 \begin_inset space ~
21685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21687 reference "tab:Table-float"
21694 \begin_layout Standard
21695 \begin_inset Float table
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21706 name "tab:Table-float"
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 \begin_inset Tabular
21721 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21722 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21723 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21724 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21725 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21852 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21876 \end{array}\right]$
21884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21918 \begin_layout Subsection
21920 \begin_inset Index idx
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 \begin_layout Standard
21933 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21934 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21935 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21937 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
21945 \begin_inset space ~
21953 \begin_layout Section
21955 \begin_inset Index idx
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21967 name "sec:Minipages"
21974 \begin_layout Standard
21975 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
21977 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21978 \begin_inset space \space{}
21985 \begin_layout Standard
21986 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21988 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21992 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21993 and its alignment within the page.
21996 \begin_layout Standard
21998 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22008 height_special "totalheight"
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 This is a minipage.
22015 The text is set in an italic style.
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22022 another formatting.
22030 \begin_layout Standard
22031 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22034 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22038 as described in section
22039 \begin_inset space ~
22043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22045 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22050 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22056 \begin_layout Standard
22057 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22067 height_special "totalheight"
22070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22071 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22072 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22078 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22082 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22092 height_special "totalheight"
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22097 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22105 \begin_layout Standard
22106 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22112 \begin_layout Standard
22113 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22115 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22122 \begin_inset space ~
22130 \begin_layout Chapter
22131 Mathematical Formulas
22132 \begin_inset Index idx
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 \begin_inset Index idx
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22176 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22183 \begin_layout Standard
22184 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22189 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22192 \begin_layout Section
22194 \begin_inset Index idx
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 \begin_layout Standard
22207 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22220 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22222 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22223 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22224 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22226 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22232 \begin_layout Standard
22233 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22237 \begin_inset space ~
22242 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22245 \begin_layout Standard
22246 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22247 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22250 \begin_layout Standard
22251 This is a line with an inline formula
22252 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22258 \begin_layout Standard
22259 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22260 paragraph, like this one:
22261 \begin_inset Formula
22268 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22271 \begin_layout Standard
22272 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22273 For example, typing
22274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22287 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22288 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22292 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22295 \begin_inset space ~
22303 \begin_layout Subsection
22304 Navigating in Formulas
22305 \begin_inset Index idx
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 \begin_layout Standard
22318 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22319 achieved with the arrow keys.
22320 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22321 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22326 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22327 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22331 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22335 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22338 \end{array}\right]$
22346 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22351 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22352 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22355 \begin_layout Standard
22360 , printed in this document as
22361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22382 \begin_inset Note Note
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
22387 the space character (visible space).
22392 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22393 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22394 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22399 For example, if you want
22400 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22454 , since in the latter case only the
22457 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22462 will be under the square root sign:
22463 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22469 \begin_layout Standard
22470 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22472 \begin_inset Formula
22474 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22483 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22484 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22487 \begin_layout Subsection
22491 \begin_layout Standard
22492 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22493 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22497 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22498 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22499 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22500 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22501 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22504 \begin_layout Subsection
22505 Exponents and Subscripts
22506 \begin_inset Index idx
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 \begin_inset Index idx
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 \begin_layout Standard
22529 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22532 arg "math-superscript"
22538 arg "math-subscript"
22541 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22543 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22546 , type in a formula
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22574 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22578 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22608 , you have to use an extra
22612 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22613 For example, if you want
22614 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 Subscripts are similar: To get
22636 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 \begin_layout Subsection
22661 \begin_inset Index idx
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22673 \begin_layout Standard
22674 Create a fraction either with the command
22680 or by using the icon
22683 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22689 \begin_inset space ~
22695 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22696 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22697 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22702 To move back up, press
22707 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22708 \begin_inset Formula
22710 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22713 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22721 \begin_layout Subsection
22723 \begin_inset Index idx
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22735 \begin_layout Standard
22736 Roots can be created using the
22739 \begin_inset space ~
22747 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22753 arg "math-insert \\root"
22775 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22781 always produces a square root.
22784 \begin_layout Subsection
22785 Operators with Limits
22786 \begin_inset Index idx
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22796 \begin_inset Index idx
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22808 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22815 \begin_layout Standard
22817 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22821 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22824 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22825 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22826 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22827 The sum operator will automatically place its
22828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22835 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22837 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22841 \begin_inset Formula
22843 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22848 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22852 \begin_layout Standard
22853 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22855 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22856 behind the operator and using the menu
22858 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22859 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22861 \begin_inset space ~
22865 \begin_inset space ~
22879 \begin_layout Standard
22880 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22889 \begin_inset Index idx
22892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22899 \begin_inset Formula
22901 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22906 which will place the
22907 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22919 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22920 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22926 \begin_layout Standard
22927 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22934 Have a look at section
22935 \begin_inset space ~
22939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22941 reference "sub:Functions"
22945 for an explanation of function macros.
22948 \begin_layout Subsection
22950 \begin_inset Index idx
22953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22962 \begin_layout Standard
22963 Most math symbols can be found in the
22966 \begin_inset space ~
22971 under one of several categories; including
22988 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22992 \begin_layout Standard
22993 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22994 you don't have to use the
22997 \begin_inset space ~
23002 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23003 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23006 \begin_layout Subsection
23008 \begin_inset Index idx
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23020 \begin_layout Standard
23021 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23026 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23032 \begin_inset space ~
23042 arg "math-insert \\space"
23048 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23049 For example, the sequence
23054 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23058 \begin_inset Graphics
23059 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23064 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23065 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23066 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23067 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23069 Here are two examples:
23072 \begin_layout Standard
23082 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23088 \begin_layout Standard
23098 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23104 \begin_layout Subsection
23106 \begin_inset Index idx
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23118 name "sub:Functions"
23125 \begin_layout Standard
23129 \begin_inset space ~
23134 contains under the button
23139 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23144 a number of function macros, such as
23145 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23149 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23157 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23164 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23165 avoid confusions, because
23166 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23170 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23176 \begin_layout Standard
23177 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23179 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23183 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23189 \begin_layout Standard
23190 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23191 are placed, as described in section
23192 \begin_inset space ~
23196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23198 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23205 \begin_layout Subsection
23207 \begin_inset Index idx
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 \begin_layout Standard
23220 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23222 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23223 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23224 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23227 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23228 Our example is entered by typing
23236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 \begin_inset space ~
23253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23255 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23259 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23262 \begin_layout Standard
23263 \begin_inset Float table
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23274 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23278 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 \begin_inset Tabular
23289 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23290 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23291 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23293 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23539 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23755 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23875 \begin_layout Standard
23876 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23879 \begin_inset space ~
23887 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23890 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23894 \begin_layout Section
23895 Brackets and Delimiters
23896 \begin_inset Index idx
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset Index idx
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23918 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23925 \begin_layout Standard
23926 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23927 For some purposes, using just the keys
23932 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23933 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23934 toolbar delimiter icon
23937 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23941 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23942 \begin_inset Formula
23944 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23952 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23953 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23957 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23960 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23966 \begin_inset Formula
23968 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23976 \begin_layout Standard
23977 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23978 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23982 \begin_layout Standard
23983 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23984 left side and right side.
23985 If you use the option
23988 \begin_inset space ~
23993 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23994 The selection will be shown below the button field.
23995 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use the blank button.
23996 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23999 \begin_layout Standard
24000 If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root,
24001 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to
24002 go inside the brackets.
24003 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24008 The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure.
24009 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24010 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24011 For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select
24012 the structure and enter
24015 arg "math-delim ( )"
24021 \begin_layout Section
24022 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24023 \begin_inset Index idx
24026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24033 \begin_inset Index idx
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 \begin_inset Index idx
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24055 \begin_layout Standard
24056 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24059 \begin_inset space ~
24069 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24075 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24076 Here is an example:
24077 \begin_inset Formula
24079 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24088 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24089 \begin_inset space ~
24093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24095 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24100 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24101 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24102 This alignment is set in the box
24107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24155 for every column as default.
24156 For example, the sequence
24157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24168 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24169 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24170 corresponds to the relevant column.
24171 The result will look like this:
24172 \begin_inset Formula
24175 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24176 column & has & has\, right\\
24177 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24186 \begin_layout Standard
24187 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24190 arg "newline-insert newline"
24193 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24194 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24196 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24199 or the math toolbar.
24202 \begin_layout Standard
24203 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24204 It can be created with the menu
24206 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24207 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24209 \begin_inset space ~
24221 Here is an example:
24222 \begin_inset Formula
24236 \begin_layout Standard
24237 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24240 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24243 arg "newline-insert newline"
24247 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24252 arg "newline-insert newline"
24255 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24263 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24264 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24265 A new row is created by every further entry of
24268 arg "newline-insert newline"
24272 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24273 Here is an example:
24274 \begin_inset Formula
24276 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24277 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24282 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24283 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24284 \begin_inset Formula
24286 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24294 \begin_layout Standard
24295 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24302 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24303 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24306 reference "eq:asquared"
24311 The other types are described in section
24312 \begin_inset space ~
24316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24318 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24325 \begin_layout Section
24326 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24327 \begin_inset Index idx
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 Math ! Formula numbering
24337 \begin_inset Index idx
24340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24341 Math ! Referencing formulas
24347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24349 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24356 \begin_layout Standard
24357 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24359 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24360 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24362 \begin_inset space ~
24366 \begin_inset space ~
24374 arg "math-number-toggle"
24378 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24379 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24380 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24381 the document class.
24382 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24383 separated by a dot:
24384 \begin_inset Formula
24394 arg "math-number-toggle"
24397 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24398 You can only number displayed formulas.
24401 \begin_layout Standard
24402 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24404 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24405 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24407 \begin_inset space ~
24411 \begin_inset space ~
24419 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24422 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24423 \begin_inset Formula
24426 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24432 To number all lines use the shortcut
24435 arg "math-number-toggle"
24441 \begin_layout Standard
24442 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24445 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24446 A label is inserted with the menu
24448 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24457 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24458 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24459 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24471 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24472 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24473 We inserted in the following example the label
24474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24481 in the second line:
24482 \begin_inset Formula
24484 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24485 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24490 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24491 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24492 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24494 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24496 \begin_inset space ~
24504 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24508 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24509 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24510 as the formula number:
24513 \begin_layout Standard
24514 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24517 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24524 \begin_layout Standard
24525 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24526 \begin_inset space ~
24530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24532 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24537 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24545 \begin_layout Section
24546 User defined math macros
24547 \begin_inset Index idx
24550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 \begin_layout Standard
24560 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24561 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24562 Math macros are explained in section
24565 \begin_inset space ~
24577 \begin_layout Section
24581 \begin_layout Subsection
24583 \begin_inset Index idx
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24595 \begin_layout Standard
24596 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24597 To set a font in a formula, use the
24600 \begin_inset space ~
24610 arg "math-insert \\font"
24615 , or enter its command, listed in table
24616 \begin_inset space ~
24620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24622 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24630 \begin_inset Float table
24635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24641 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24645 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24655 \begin_inset Tabular
24656 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24657 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24658 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24659 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24718 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24745 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24778 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24805 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24832 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24866 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24893 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24927 \begin_layout Standard
24928 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24952 \begin_layout Standard
24953 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24954 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24959 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24960 space when you need a space in the box.
24961 Here is an example where
24962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24973 denotes the set of numbers:
24974 \begin_inset Formula
24976 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24984 \begin_layout Standard
24985 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24986 You can, for example, put a character in
24995 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24999 \begin_inset Newline newline
25002 So it is better not to use this feature.
25005 \begin_layout Standard
25006 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25007 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25011 \begin_inset Newline newline
25014 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25020 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25021 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25027 \begin_layout Standard
25034 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25037 \begin_layout Standard
25038 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25040 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25041 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25043 \begin_inset space ~
25051 \begin_layout Subsection
25053 \begin_inset Index idx
25056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25065 \begin_layout Standard
25066 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25068 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25072 \begin_inset space ~
25076 \begin_inset space ~
25084 \begin_inset space ~
25094 arg "math-insert \\font"
25106 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25107 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25108 Here is an example:
25109 \begin_inset Formula
25112 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25113 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25122 \begin_layout Subsection
25124 \begin_inset Index idx
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25136 \begin_layout Standard
25137 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25138 automatically chosen in most situations.
25156 For most characters,
25164 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25165 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25170 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25171 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25173 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25178 arg "math-insert \\style"
25184 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25185 For example, you can set
25186 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25189 , which is normally in
25198 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25202 The four styles are used in the following example:
25205 \begin_layout Standard
25206 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25210 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25214 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25218 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25224 \begin_layout Standard
25225 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25226 is set in a particular size with the menu
25228 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25230 \begin_inset space ~
25235 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25236 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25237 will be adjusted to correspond.
25238 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25249 \begin_layout Standard
25253 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25259 \begin_layout Section
25261 \begin_inset Index idx
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 \begin_inset Index idx
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_layout Standard
25284 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25285 (AMS) that are in common use.
25288 \begin_layout Subsection
25289 Enabling AMS-Support
25292 \begin_layout Standard
25293 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25294 the document by selecting the checkbox
25297 \begin_inset space ~
25301 \begin_inset space ~
25305 \begin_inset space ~
25312 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25316 \begin_inset Index idx
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 Document ! Settings
25328 \begin_inset space ~
25334 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25335 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25338 \begin_layout Subsection
25340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25342 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25347 \begin_inset Index idx
25350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25359 \begin_layout Standard
25360 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25361 LyX allows you to choose between
25382 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25383 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25389 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25392 \begin_layout Chapter
25396 \begin_layout Section
25398 \begin_inset Index idx
25401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25410 name "sec:Cross-References"
25417 \begin_layout Standard
25418 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25419 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25421 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25422 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25423 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25426 \begin_layout Enumerate
25430 \begin_layout Enumerate
25431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25433 name "enu:Second-item"
25440 \begin_layout Enumerate
25444 \begin_layout Standard
25445 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25447 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25450 or by pressing the toolbar button
25457 A gray label box like this:
25458 \begin_inset Graphics
25459 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25464 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25465 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25500 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25501 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25517 \begin_layout Standard
25518 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25520 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25523 or the toolbar button
25526 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25530 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25531 \begin_inset Graphics
25532 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25537 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25539 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25552 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25556 \begin_layout Standard
25557 As an alternative to
25559 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25562 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25567 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25568 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25570 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25582 \begin_layout Standard
25583 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25584 \begin_inset space ~
25588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25590 reference "enu:Second-item"
25597 \begin_layout Standard
25598 It is recommended to use a protected space
25602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25603 described in section
25604 \begin_inset space ~
25608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25610 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25619 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25620 line breaks between them.
25623 \begin_layout Standard
25624 There are six formats of cross-references:
25627 \begin_layout Description
25628 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25631 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25638 \begin_layout Description
25639 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25640 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25652 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25659 \begin_layout Description
25660 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25661 \begin_inset space ~
25665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25666 LatexCommand pageref
25667 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25674 \begin_layout Description
25676 \begin_inset space ~
25680 \begin_inset space ~
25683 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25685 LatexCommand vpageref
25686 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25691 \begin_inset Newline newline
25694 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25695 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25696 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25697 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25698 it prints “on the next page”.
25699 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25702 \begin_layout Description
25704 \begin_inset space ~
25708 \begin_inset space ~
25712 \begin_inset space ~
25715 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25718 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25723 \begin_inset Newline newline
25726 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25732 ; otherwise it behaves like
25736 \begin_inset space ~
25740 \begin_inset space ~
25749 \begin_layout Description
25751 \begin_inset space ~
25754 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25755 \begin_inset Newline newline
25759 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25767 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25776 \begin_inset Index idx
25779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25780 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25786 \begin_inset Index idx
25789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25801 \begin_inset Newline newline
25804 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25807 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25812 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25820 is the default and preferred because
25824 supports only English documents.
25825 The format is specified by using the command
25837 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25838 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25851 ) can be done with this command
25852 \begin_inset Newline newline
25859 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25864 \begin_inset Newline newline
25867 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25869 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25871 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25878 \begin_layout Description
25880 \begin_inset space ~
25883 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25885 LatexCommand nameref
25886 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25893 \begin_layout Standard
25894 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25895 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25896 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25900 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25904 \begin_layout Standard
25905 You can only use the style
25909 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25913 is always possible.
25916 \begin_layout Standard
25917 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25918 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25920 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25921 \begin_inset space ~
25925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25927 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25934 \begin_layout Standard
25935 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25939 \begin_inset space ~
25943 \begin_inset space ~
25948 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25949 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25952 \begin_inset space ~
25957 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25958 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25961 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25967 \begin_layout Standard
25968 You can change labels at any time.
25969 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25970 do not need to think about this.
25973 \begin_layout Standard
25974 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
25975 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
25976 instead of the reference.
25979 \begin_layout Standard
25980 References are described in detail in the section
25981 \begin_inset space ~
25985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25995 \begin_inset space ~
26003 \begin_layout Section
26004 Table of Contents and other Listings
26005 \begin_inset Index idx
26008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26015 \begin_inset Index idx
26018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26034 \begin_layout Subsection
26036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26038 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26045 \begin_layout Standard
26046 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26048 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26049 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26051 \begin_inset space ~
26055 \begin_inset space ~
26061 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26062 If you click on it, the
26066 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26067 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26068 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26070 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26073 that is described in sec.
26074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26080 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26089 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26091 \begin_inset space ~
26095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26097 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26101 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26103 \begin_inset space ~
26107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26109 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26113 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26115 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26118 \begin_layout Subsection
26119 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26122 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26129 \begin_layout Standard
26130 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26131 You can insert them via the
26133 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26137 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26140 \begin_layout Section
26141 URLs and Hyperlinks
26142 \begin_inset Index idx
26145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26152 \begin_inset Index idx
26155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26164 \begin_layout Subsection
26166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26175 \begin_layout Standard
26176 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26178 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26184 \begin_layout Standard
26185 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26186 \begin_inset Flex URL
26189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26199 \begin_layout Standard
26200 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26206 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26210 \begin_layout Standard
26211 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26219 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26227 \begin_layout Subsection
26229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26231 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26238 \begin_layout Standard
26239 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26241 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26244 or with the toolbar button
26251 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26260 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26261 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26264 name "LyX's homepage"
26265 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26269 , an Email address like this:
26270 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26272 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26273 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26278 , or a link to a file.
26281 \begin_layout Standard
26282 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26295 to the link target.
26298 \begin_layout Standard
26299 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26300 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26301 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26302 the text style dialog.
26303 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26307 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26309 name "LyX's homepage"
26310 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26317 \begin_layout Standard
26318 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26322 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26324 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26325 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26329 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26331 \begin_inset Newline newline
26339 \begin_inset Newline newline
26346 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26349 \begin_layout Section
26351 \begin_inset Index idx
26354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26363 name "sec:Appendices"
26370 \begin_layout Standard
26371 Appendices are created with the menu
26373 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26375 \begin_inset space ~
26379 \begin_inset space ~
26385 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26386 as the appendix part of the book.
26387 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26390 \begin_layout Standard
26391 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26392 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26393 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26394 and the subsection number.
26395 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26399 \begin_layout Standard
26401 \begin_inset space ~
26405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26407 reference "chap:Credits"
26412 \begin_inset space ~
26416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26418 reference "sub:Export"
26425 \begin_layout Section
26427 \begin_inset Index idx
26430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26439 name "sec:Bibliography"
26446 \begin_layout Standard
26447 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26448 You can include a bibliography database,
26452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26453 Known under the name
26454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26466 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26467 manually, using the paragraph environment
26471 , which was described in section
26472 \begin_inset space ~
26476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26478 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26483 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26484 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26488 use a bibliography database.
26491 \begin_layout Subsection
26492 The Bibliography Environment
26495 \begin_layout Standard
26500 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26502 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26511 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26513 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26522 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26525 \begin_layout Standard
26526 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26528 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26531 or the toolbar button
26534 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26538 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26539 containing the available citations.
26540 Select one or more keys from the list and
26550 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26551 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26555 \begin_layout Standard
26556 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26557 entry with surrounding brackets.
26562 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26563 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26575 \begin_layout Standard
26578 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26581 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26583 key "latexcompanion"
26590 \begin_layout Standard
26591 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26601 \begin_layout Standard
26602 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26605 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26607 \begin_inset space ~
26615 arg "layout-paragraph"
26619 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26622 \begin_layout Subsection
26623 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26624 \begin_inset Index idx
26627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26628 Bibliography ! Databases
26634 \begin_inset Index idx
26637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26638 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26646 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26653 \begin_layout Standard
26654 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26662 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26663 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26668 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26670 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26671 your working field in a database.
26672 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26673 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26674 list for that document.
26675 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26679 \begin_layout Standard
26680 The database is a text file with the file extension
26681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26692 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26693 The format is explained in
26694 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26700 and in the LaTeX books (
26701 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26703 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26708 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26709 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26710 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26711 \begin_inset Flex URL
26714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26716 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26724 \begin_layout Standard
26725 To use a database, use the menu
26727 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26732 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26745 \begin_inset space ~
26751 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26752 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26759 Add bibliography to TOC
26761 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26766 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26767 in the document or just the cited references.
26770 \begin_layout Standard
26771 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26783 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26784 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26785 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26787 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26793 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26794 \begin_inset Newline newline
26798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26800 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26812 \begin_layout Standard
26813 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26816 \begin_layout Standard
26817 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26818 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26824 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26825 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26830 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26831 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26832 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26847 The following variants are possible:
26850 \begin_layout Description
26851 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26852 with other bibliography packages (e.
26853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26857 \begin_inset space \space{}
26864 ), only with the package
26868 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26872 \begin_layout Description
26873 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26874 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26875 with all bibliography packages, except
26880 \begin_layout Description
26881 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26886 , works with all bibliography packages
26889 \begin_layout Standard
26890 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26892 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26907 \begin_layout Standard
26908 When you select the option
26910 Sectioned bibliography
26914 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26915 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26918 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26919 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26921 Customizing Bibliographies
26929 Additional Features
26934 \begin_layout Standard
26935 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26936 the two methods of creating them.
26937 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26938 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26939 We used the style file
26943 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26946 \begin_layout Subsection
26947 Bibliography layout
26948 \begin_inset Index idx
26951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26952 Bibliography ! Layout
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26961 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26962 For this feature you need to enable the option
26968 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26972 \begin_inset Index idx
26975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26976 Document ! Settings
26986 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26987 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26988 in the previous section.
26991 \begin_layout Standard
26992 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26993 the citation reference window.
26994 Here is an example where the text
26995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26999 \begin_inset space ~
27003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27006 appears after the reference:
27009 \begin_layout Standard
27011 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27014 key "latexcompanion"
27021 \begin_layout Section
27023 \begin_inset Index idx
27026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27042 \begin_layout Standard
27043 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27045 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27047 \begin_inset space ~
27052 or the toolbar button
27059 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27060 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27061 by LyX as the index entry.
27064 \begin_layout Standard
27065 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27067 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27068 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27070 \begin_inset space ~
27076 A light blue box labeled
27077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27088 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27089 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27092 \begin_layout Standard
27093 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27094 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27096 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27098 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27105 \begin_layout Subsection
27106 Grouping Index Entries
27107 \begin_inset Index idx
27110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27119 \begin_layout Standard
27120 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27122 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27123 lists under the entry
27124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27132 First we create the entry
27133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27141 \begin_inset space ~
27145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27147 reference "sub:Lists"
27152 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27153 \begin_inset space ~
27157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27159 reference "sec:Itemize"
27163 , we insert the command
27166 \begin_layout Standard
27172 \begin_layout Standard
27176 \begin_layout Standard
27182 \begin_layout Standard
27183 for the enumerated list in section
27184 \begin_inset space ~
27188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27190 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27197 \begin_layout Standard
27198 The exclamation mark
27199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27206 marks the grouping levels.
27207 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27208 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27209 If we don't have an index entry for
27210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27217 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27220 \begin_layout Subsection
27222 \begin_inset Index idx
27225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27226 Index ! Page ranges
27234 \begin_layout Standard
27235 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27237 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27238 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27239 an index entry in section
27240 \begin_inset space ~
27244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27246 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27256 Paragraph environments|(
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27260 and another entry at the end of section
27261 \begin_inset space ~
27265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27267 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27274 \begin_layout Standard
27277 Paragraph environments|)
27280 \begin_layout Standard
27282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27305 respectively start and end the index range.
27306 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27307 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27308 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27309 An example is the index entry
27310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27313 Document ! Settings
27314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27320 \begin_layout Subsection
27322 \begin_inset Index idx
27325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27326 Index ! Cross referencing
27334 \begin_layout Standard
27335 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27336 We referred for example in the index entry
27337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27345 \begin_inset space ~
27349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27351 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27355 ) to the index entry
27356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27363 in the same section using the entry
27366 \begin_layout Standard
27369 GIF|see{Image formats}
27372 \begin_layout Standard
27373 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27374 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27375 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27378 \begin_layout Subsection
27380 \begin_inset Index idx
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27384 Index ! Entry order
27392 \begin_layout Standard
27393 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27394 follow the rules for the index order.
27395 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27400 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27402 \begin_inset space ~
27406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27408 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27417 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27418 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27443 \begin_inset Index idx
27446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 Dummy entries ! maïs
27453 \begin_inset Index idx
27456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27457 Dummy entries ! maître
27463 \begin_inset Index idx
27466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27467 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27472 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27473 maïs, maison, maître.
27474 To achieve this, we use the command
27477 \begin_layout Standard
27480 previous entry@current entry
27483 \begin_layout Standard
27484 In our case we want to have
27485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27500 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27503 \begin_layout Standard
27509 \begin_layout Standard
27510 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27511 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27512 See the next subsection for an example.
27515 \begin_layout Standard
27516 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27522 \begin_layout Standard
27523 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27528 to generate the index (see sec.
27529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27535 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27544 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27552 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27556 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27557 index commands start with
27558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27570 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27575 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27578 \begin_layout Standard
27590 \begin_layout Standard
27602 \begin_layout Subsection
27604 \begin_inset Index idx
27607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27608 Index ! Entry layout
27616 \begin_layout Standard
27617 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27618 \begin_inset Index idx
27621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27624 This is an italic dummy entry
27629 You can also format the page number using the character
27630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27637 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27638 We can write for example
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27644 italic page number:|textit
27647 \begin_layout Standard
27648 to get the page number in italic.
27649 \begin_inset Index idx
27652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27653 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27658 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27676 \begin_inset space ~
27682 Have a look at section
27683 \begin_inset space ~
27687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27689 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27693 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27696 \begin_layout Standard
27697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27705 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27709 to generate the index, see sec.
27710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27716 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27725 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27730 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27731 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27734 key "latexcompanion"
27746 \begin_layout Standard
27747 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27749 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27750 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27751 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27752 If so, put the following in the preamble
27755 \begin_layout Standard
27767 \begin_layout Standard
27771 \begin_layout Standard
27777 \begin_layout Standard
27778 in the index entry.
27779 \begin_inset Index idx
27782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27783 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27788 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27789 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27790 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27793 \begin_layout Standard
27794 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27795 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27796 a bold font for all index entries.
27797 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27809 documentation for details,
27810 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27812 key "makeindex,xindy"
27819 \begin_layout Subsection
27821 \begin_inset Index idx
27824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27833 name "sub:Index-Program"
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27841 If the index generation program
27845 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27849 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27858 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27859 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27860 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27861 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27862 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27872 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27873 dialog, see section
27874 \begin_inset space ~
27878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27880 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27885 The available options are listed and explained in
27886 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27888 key "makeindex,xindy"
27893 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27897 \begin_layout Standard
27898 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27899 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27902 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27903 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27907 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27908 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27911 \begin_layout Subsection
27915 \begin_layout Standard
27916 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27917 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27925 next to the standard index.
27926 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27927 that add this feature.
27933 \begin_inset Index idx
27936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27937 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27942 package to generate multiple indexes.
27943 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27948 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
27949 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27956 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27957 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27958 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27966 \begin_layout Standard
27967 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27969 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27970 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27973 and select the option
27975 Use multiple Indexes
27982 already contains the standard index
27983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27991 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27992 also appear as a heading) to the
27996 input field and press the
28001 The new index now also appears in the list.
28002 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28006 \begin_layout Standard
28007 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28010 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28017 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28018 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28019 are additional features:
28022 \begin_layout Itemize
28023 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28024 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28027 \begin_layout Itemize
28028 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28029 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28037 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28038 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28039 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28040 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28043 \begin_layout Section
28044 Nomenclature / Glossary
28045 \begin_inset Index idx
28048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28055 \begin_inset Index idx
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28089 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28096 \begin_layout Standard
28097 Sometimes you need to compile a list of symbols that are mentioned in your
28098 document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or
28102 \begin_layout Standard
28103 To be able to create nomenclatures, you need the LaTeX package
28108 \begin_inset Index idx
28111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28112 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28118 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28119 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28125 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28128 \begin_layout Standard
28129 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28130 and then use the menu
28132 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28138 \begin_inset space ~
28143 or the toolbar button
28146 arg "nomencl-insert"
28151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28162 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28167 The first is the symbol that you want to refer to.
28168 The second is the description of the symbol.
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28172 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28180 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28188 \begin_layout Subsection
28189 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28190 \begin_inset Index idx
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28194 Nomenclature ! Layout
28202 \begin_layout Standard
28203 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28207 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28213 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28221 \begin_inset Newline newline
28229 \begin_inset Newline newline
28235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28242 character starts/ends the formula.
28243 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28255 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28265 \begin_layout Standard
28266 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28267 \begin_inset space ~
28271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28273 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28280 \begin_layout Standard
28284 \begin_inset space ~
28289 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28290 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28295 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28302 in this document is:
28303 \begin_inset Newline newline
28308 dummy entry for the character
28313 \begin_inset Newline newline
28325 \begin_inset space ~
28335 font use the command
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 If the characters |
28366 \begin_inset space \space{}
28370 \begin_inset space \space{}
28374 \begin_inset space \space{}
28378 \begin_inset space \space{}
28382 \begin_inset space \space{}
28385 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28386 a quote character in front of them.
28387 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28388 LatexCommand nomenclature
28389 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28390 description "The quote sign is output by writing ' \"\"\"\" '"
28397 \begin_layout Subsection
28398 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28399 \begin_inset Index idx
28402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28403 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28411 \begin_layout Standard
28412 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28413 the symbol definition.
28414 This leads to undesired results when you for example have symbols in formulas.
28415 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28419 LatexCommand nomenclature
28421 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28428 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28432 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28433 LatexCommand nomenclature
28436 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28441 They will be sorted by
28442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28468 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28471 will be sorted before the
28475 since the character
28476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28483 is considered in sorting.
28486 \begin_layout Standard
28487 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28490 \begin_inset space ~
28495 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28496 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28498 For the example given, you can insert
28502 in this field for the
28503 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28510 will be located before
28511 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28523 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28532 \begin_layout Subsection
28533 Nomenclature Options
28534 \begin_inset Index idx
28537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28538 Nomenclature ! Options
28546 \begin_layout Standard
28551 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28552 Here are some of its options, for more have a look at its documentation:
28555 \begin_layout Description
28556 refeq Appends the phrase
28557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28572 to every nomenclature entry, where
28578 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28581 \begin_layout Description
28582 refpage Appends the phrase
28583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28598 to every nomenclature entry, where
28604 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28607 \begin_layout Description
28608 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28611 \begin_layout Standard
28612 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28613 class options list in the
28615 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28619 In this document the options
28626 \begin_layout Standard
28627 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28633 \begin_layout Standard
28634 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28635 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28640 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28643 \begin_layout Description
28653 \begin_layout Description
28656 nomrefpage Like the
28663 \begin_layout Description
28666 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28675 \begin_layout Description
28679 \begin_inset space ~
28685 \begin_inset space ~
28690 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28693 \begin_layout Standard
28695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28702 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28703 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28706 \begin_layout Standard
28714 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28717 \begin_inset Newline newline
28724 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28729 \begin_inset Newline newline
28733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28748 by their translation.
28751 \begin_layout Subsection
28752 Printing the Nomenclature
28753 \begin_inset Index idx
28756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28757 Nomenclature ! Printing
28765 \begin_layout Standard
28766 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28768 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28770 \begin_inset space ~
28774 \begin_inset space ~
28777 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28793 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28794 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28795 You can choose between these settings:
28798 \begin_layout Description
28799 Default a space of 1
28800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28806 \begin_layout Description
28808 \begin_inset space ~
28812 \begin_inset space ~
28815 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28818 \begin_layout Description
28819 Custom custom space
28822 \begin_layout Standard
28823 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28832 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28840 For example, in order to change the name to
28844 , add the following line to the preamble:
28847 \begin_layout Standard
28855 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28858 \begin_layout Subsection
28859 Nomenclature Program
28860 \begin_inset Index idx
28863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28864 Nomenclature ! Program
28870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28872 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28879 \begin_layout Standard
28880 LyX uses the program
28884 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28885 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28890 by adding options, see section
28891 \begin_inset space ~
28895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28897 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28902 The available options are listed and explained in
28903 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28905 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28912 \begin_layout Section
28914 \begin_inset Index idx
28917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28924 \begin_inset Index idx
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28928 Document ! Branches
28934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28936 name "sec:Branches"
28943 \begin_layout Standard
28944 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28945 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28946 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28947 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28950 \begin_layout Standard
28951 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28952 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28953 To create a branch, either select the menu
28955 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28956 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28959 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28961 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28968 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28969 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28970 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28971 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28972 (see below for an example).
28973 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28974 to the name of the other) and to add
28975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28987 \begin_inset space ~
28990 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28991 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28994 \begin_layout Standard
28995 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28996 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28998 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29001 where you can choose a branch.
29002 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29006 \begin_layout Standard
29007 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29008 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29011 \begin_layout Standard
29012 \begin_inset Branch Question
29015 \begin_layout Standard
29016 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29024 \begin_layout Standard
29025 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29028 \begin_layout Standard
29029 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29037 \begin_layout Standard
29044 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29045 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29048 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29049 Consider for example a file
29050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29057 which has the above branches.
29059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29066 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29090 branch were inactive,
29091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29106 branch was active, likewise
29107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29122 branch was active, and
29123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29126 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29130 if both branches were active.
29131 This helps you to easily export different versions of your document without
29135 \begin_layout Standard
29136 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29142 \begin_layout Standard
29143 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29144 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29146 For example you can define for the question branch
29150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29151 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29152 \begin_inset space ~
29156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29158 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29180 \begin_layout Standard
29190 \begin_layout Standard
29191 and for the answer branch
29194 \begin_layout Standard
29204 \begin_layout Standard
29214 \begin_layout Standard
29215 \begin_inset Branch Question
29218 \begin_layout Standard
29222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29250 \begin_layout Standard
29251 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29254 \begin_layout Standard
29258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29286 \begin_layout Standard
29287 Now it is possible to use the commands
29291 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29298 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29301 to obtain conditional output.
29302 Here is an example formula where only the
29309 \begin_inset Formula
29311 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29320 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29326 \change_inserted 5863208 1334492666
29330 \begin_layout Standard
29332 \change_inserted 5863208 1334493356
29333 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29335 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29336 For this advanced usage, please study Customization manual (in particular
29338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29341 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29350 \begin_layout Section
29352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29354 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29359 \begin_inset Index idx
29362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29371 \begin_layout Standard
29376 dialog allows you in the
29380 to set up special options for the PDF output of your document.
29381 All options there are provided by the LaTeX-package
29386 \begin_inset Index idx
29389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29390 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29398 \begin_layout Standard
29403 will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29404 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29405 table of contents entry or on a reference and he is shown the referenced
29407 You can specify in the dialog tab
29411 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29413 The backreferences will appear in the bibliography behind the different
29414 entries, showing the number of the section, slide, or page where the entry
29418 \begin_layout Standard
29423 you can set if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of your
29424 document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29425 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29427 With the open bookmarks level you can specify what sectioning level should
29428 be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
29430 \begin_inset space ~
29433 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29434 \begin_inset space ~
29437 1 will only display the sections.
29440 \begin_layout Standard
29441 The header information in the dialog tab
29445 are saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29446 Many programs are able to extract this information to e.
29447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29451 \begin_inset space \space{}
29454 automatically recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29455 This is very useful to sort, classify, or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29458 Automatic fill header
29460 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29461 title and author settings.
29464 \begin_layout Standard
29467 Load in fullscreen mode
29469 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29472 \begin_layout Standard
29473 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29474 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29480 For an explanation of them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29481 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29490 \begin_layout Section
29491 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29494 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29501 \begin_layout Subsection
29503 \begin_inset Index idx
29506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29515 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29522 \begin_layout Standard
29523 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29524 constructs, but not all.
29525 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29526 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29527 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29528 is for every problem a LaTeX-package.
29529 But LyX can of course not be up to date and support all packages and their
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29534 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29536 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29538 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29540 \begin_inset space ~
29545 or by the toolbar button
29558 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29566 \begin_layout Standard
29567 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29568 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29569 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29570 using the LaTeX-command
29576 , you can write the command part
29582 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29586 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29587 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29588 the following example:
29591 \begin_layout Standard
29592 \begin_inset Graphics
29593 filename clipart/ERT.png
29601 \begin_layout Standard
29605 \begin_layout Standard
29606 This is a line with a
29610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29633 \begin_layout Standard
29634 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29642 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29643 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29651 \begin_layout Subsection
29652 Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29653 \begin_inset Argument 1
29656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29663 \begin_inset Index idx
29666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29675 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29682 \begin_layout Standard
29683 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29684 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29685 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29694 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29695 any time if you know the right commands.
29697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29701 \begin_inset space \space{}
29704 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the
29706 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29707 all caption labels bold.
29708 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29710 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29714 \begin_layout Standard
29715 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29716 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29717 First you have to find out which and therefore look into the LaTeX package
29719 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29728 \begin_layout Standard
29729 As result you find that the package
29734 \begin_inset Index idx
29737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29738 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29744 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29746 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29752 \begin_layout Standard
29757 usepackage[options]{package name}
29760 \begin_layout Standard
29761 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29762 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29763 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29766 \begin_layout Standard
29767 In your case the package name is
29772 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29777 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29778 So you add the command
29781 \begin_layout Standard
29786 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29789 \begin_layout Standard
29790 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29795 For more commands provided by the
29799 package, have a look at its documentation,
29800 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29815 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29817 For example if you use a
29821 class, you don't need the package
29825 , you can instead write
29828 \begin_layout Standard
29833 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29839 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29840 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29841 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29848 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29851 \begin_layout Standard
29852 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29853 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29855 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29856 the previous section.
29859 \begin_layout Standard
29860 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29862 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29864 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29871 \begin_layout Standard
29872 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29878 \begin_layout Standard
29882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29892 \begin_inset Note Note
29895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29896 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29904 \begin_layout Left Header
29905 \begin_inset Argument 1
29908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29928 \begin_inset Note Note
29931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29932 defines the header line as described below
29940 \begin_layout Center Header
29941 \begin_inset Argument 1
29944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29953 \begin_layout Right Header
29954 \begin_inset Argument 1
29957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29978 \begin_layout Left Footer
29979 \begin_inset Argument 1
29982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30003 \begin_layout Center Footer
30004 \begin_inset Argument 1
30007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30018 \begin_inset Newline newline
30022 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30028 \begin_layout Right Footer
30029 \begin_inset Argument 1
30032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30054 \begin_layout Section
30055 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30058 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30063 \begin_inset Index idx
30066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30067 Document ! Header/Footer line
30073 \begin_inset Index idx
30076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30085 \begin_layout Standard
30086 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30087 to set the headings style to
30093 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30099 \begin_inset space ~
30105 As a second step add in the menu
30107 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30108 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30115 Custom Header/Footerlines
30116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30120 This module offers the following 6
30121 \begin_inset space ~
30127 \begin_layout Description
30129 \begin_inset space ~
30133 \begin_inset space ~
30137 \begin_inset space ~
30141 \begin_inset space ~
30145 \begin_inset space ~
30151 \begin_layout Description
30153 \begin_inset space ~
30157 \begin_inset space ~
30161 \begin_inset space ~
30165 \begin_inset space ~
30169 \begin_inset space ~
30175 \begin_layout Standard
30176 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30179 \begin_layout Standard
30180 Normally, headers and footers are set up in the beginning of the document.
30181 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30183 \begin_inset space ~
30187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30189 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30193 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30196 \begin_layout Standard
30197 \begin_inset Float figure
30203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30206 \begin_inset Tabular
30207 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30208 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30209 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30210 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30211 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30231 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30242 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30260 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30271 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30275 The normal text on the page goes here.
30276 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30278 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30279 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30284 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30293 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30304 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30322 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30333 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30351 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30369 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30374 name "fig:Page-layout"
30378 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30391 \begin_layout Subsection
30395 \begin_layout Standard
30396 To define your header line, add all 3
30397 \begin_inset space ~
30401 The things you add to the styles appear on uneven pages, the things in
30402 the optional arguments on even pages.
30403 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30405 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30406 Defining the footer line works similar.
30409 \begin_layout Standard
30410 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30413 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30426 \begin_inset space ~
30434 \begin_layout Description
30437 thepage prints the current page number
30440 \begin_layout Description
30443 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30446 \begin_layout Description
30449 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30452 \begin_layout Description
30455 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30456 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30463 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30466 because it usually goes in a left header.
30469 \begin_layout Description
30472 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30473 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30475 It is normally used in the right header.
30478 \begin_layout Subsection
30479 Default header/footer
30482 \begin_layout Standard
30483 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30484 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30485 footer has the page number.
30486 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30487 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30488 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30491 \begin_inset space ~
30499 \begin_layout Subsection
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30505 Some pages are different.
30506 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30507 a new part or chapter in your book.
30508 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30509 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30510 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30513 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30514 Header and footer decoration line
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 By default, you get a 0.4
30519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30522 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30523 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30535 in the following scheme:
30538 \begin_layout Standard
30545 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30549 Where thickness is a size in standard units like
30558 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30565 \begin_layout Standard
30566 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30567 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30568 \begin_inset space ~
30572 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30582 Several header/footer lines
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30586 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30587 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30588 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30590 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30602 in this scheme in your document preamble:
30605 \begin_layout Standard
30612 headheight}{height}
30615 \begin_layout Standard
30616 Where height is a size in standard units.
30617 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30618 your header/footer and preview your document as PDF.
30619 Then open the LaTeX logfile via the menu
30621 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30635 and look via the button
30638 \begin_inset space ~
30643 if you find a warning of the package
30648 \begin_inset Index idx
30651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30652 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30658 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30659 for your header/footer.
30662 \begin_layout Subsection
30666 \begin_layout Standard
30667 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30668 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30669 This example consists of the following definition:
30672 \begin_layout Description
30674 \begin_inset space ~
30683 , empty optional argument
30686 \begin_layout Description
30688 \begin_inset space ~
30691 Header empty, empty optional argument
30694 \begin_layout Description
30696 \begin_inset space ~
30705 in the optional argument
30708 \begin_layout Description
30710 \begin_inset space ~
30719 in the optional argument
30722 \begin_layout Description
30724 \begin_inset space ~
30736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30740 \begin_inset Newline newline
30744 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30751 in the optional argument
30754 \begin_layout Description
30756 \begin_inset space ~
30765 , empty optional argument
30768 \begin_layout Description
30771 headrulewidth set to 2
30772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30780 For more special things like e.
30781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30785 \begin_inset space ~
30788 thumb-indexes, see the manual of the
30793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30802 \begin_layout Standard
30803 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30809 \begin_layout Standard
30813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30817 pagestyle{headings}
30823 \begin_inset Note Note
30826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30827 switches back to page style with the default headings
30835 \begin_layout Section
30836 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30839 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30844 \begin_inset Index idx
30847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30854 \begin_inset Index idx
30857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30866 \begin_layout Standard
30867 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
30868 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30869 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30872 \begin_layout Subsection
30876 \begin_layout Standard
30877 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
30882 \begin_inset Index idx
30885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30886 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
30891 (on some systems named simply
30896 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
30898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30904 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
30905 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30913 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
30914 automatically installed together with LyX.
30917 \begin_layout Subsection
30921 \begin_layout Standard
30922 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
30923 LaTeX, activate the option
30926 \begin_inset space ~
30933 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30939 \begin_inset space ~
30943 \begin_inset space ~
30946 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30953 \begin_inset space ~
30966 \begin_inset space ~
30971 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30975 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
30979 \begin_layout Standard
30980 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30988 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
30989 generated by activating the option
30992 \begin_inset space ~
30998 Reopening the documents will fix such problems.
31006 \begin_layout Subsection
31007 Selected document parts
31010 \begin_layout Standard
31011 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31012 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31013 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31014 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31016 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31020 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31021 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31022 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31025 \begin_layout Standard
31026 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31032 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31043 is explained in section
31045 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31050 \begin_inset space ~
31060 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31061 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31063 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31065 Here is the result:
31068 \begin_layout Standard
31069 \begin_inset Preview
31071 \begin_layout Standard
31076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31080 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31086 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31096 height_special "totalheight"
31099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31124 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31130 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31152 \begin_layout Standard
31153 Previewing works also for colors.
31154 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31172 is explained in section
31179 \begin_inset space ~
31192 \begin_layout Standard
31193 \begin_inset Preview
31195 \begin_layout Standard
31199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31218 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31223 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31242 \begin_layout Standard
31243 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31249 \begin_layout Standard
31250 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31251 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31252 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31254 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31255 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31256 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31257 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31261 \begin_layout Subsection
31265 \begin_layout Standard
31266 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31269 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31271 \begin_inset space ~
31276 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31277 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph where the cursor is
31279 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31280 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31281 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31282 the source view window.
31285 \begin_layout Section
31286 Advanced Find and Replace
31287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31289 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31294 \begin_inset Index idx
31297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31304 \begin_inset Index idx
31307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31316 \begin_layout Subsection
31320 \begin_layout Standard
31321 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31322 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31323 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31324 The key-features are:
31327 \begin_layout Itemize
31328 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31329 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31330 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31334 \begin_layout Itemize
31335 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31336 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31337 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31338 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31341 \begin_layout Itemize
31342 Search may be widened to a specific
31347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31351 \begin_inset space ~
31354 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31355 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31362 \begin_layout Itemize
31363 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31364 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31369 \begin_inset space ~
31372 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31375 \begin_layout Subsection
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31380 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31382 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31395 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31398 ) or the toolbar button
31401 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31407 Advanced Find and Replace
31412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31416 \begin_layout Standard
31421 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31426 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31429 arg "break-paragraph"
31433 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31434 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31435 Pressing repeatedly
31438 arg "break-paragraph"
31441 keeps searching forward while pressing
31445 searches backwards.
31448 \begin_layout Standard
31453 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31463 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31467 Searching for mathematics
31470 \begin_layout Standard
31471 Mathematical formulas may be searched for by typing them the
31476 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31479 or also something more complex like
31480 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31484 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31485 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31486 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31487 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31493 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31497 \begin_layout Standard
31498 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31499 This is done by switching to the
31503 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31508 This way, entering in the
31515 \begin_layout Itemize
31516 a plain word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring
31517 in emphasized or boldface.
31520 \begin_layout Itemize
31521 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31522 instances with same face only, and within the same text style only.
31525 \begin_layout Itemize
31526 a plain word in a section heading, and searching for it, finds occurrences
31527 of if only within section headings.
31528 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31529 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31533 \begin_layout Itemize
31534 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31535 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31543 The document segments entered in the
31547 editor can be replaced with the text segments entered in the
31555 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31559 button or alternatively
31566 arg "break-paragraph"
31573 while the cursor is in the
31583 \begin_layout Standard
31584 You can replace with full-featured formatted LyX segments.
31585 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability may be (just to mention
31589 \begin_layout Itemize
31590 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31591 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31599 with its typewriter version
31600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31614 \begin_layout Itemize
31615 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31621 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31633 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31640 (you may want to enable the
31648 options and disable the
31656 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31664 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31665 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31669 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31672 , or occurrences of
31673 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31677 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31683 \begin_layout Subsection
31687 \begin_layout Standard
31688 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31693 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31697 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31706 You can search for regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31712 This is done via the menu
31714 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31715 Insert Regular Expression
31717 while the cursor is in the
31722 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31723 expression matching rules
31727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31728 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31734 \begin_inset space ~
31737 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31738 to match expressions.
31743 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31744 same text in the document.
31745 It is allowed to cut and paste regexp-mode insets as usual.
31746 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31749 \begin_layout Enumerate
31750 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31755 editor the fraction
31756 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31760 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31763 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31764 fractions with the given denominator.
31767 \begin_layout Enumerate
31768 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31780 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31785 regular expression and adding for it an emphasized or bold face, finds
31786 all emphasized and bold face text, respectively.
31788 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31791 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31792 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31795 \begin_layout Standard
31796 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31797 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31798 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31801 , and referring back to them through
31802 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31806 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31810 For example, try searching for the regexp
31811 \begin_inset Newline newline
31814 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31817 \begin_inset Newline newline
31820 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31823 \begin_layout Standard
31824 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31827 \begin_layout Standard
31828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31837 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31838 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31839 sub-expressions is absolute.
31841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31845 \begin_inset space ~
31849 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31852 always refers to the first occurrence of
31853 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31856 in all entered regexps.
31864 \begin_layout Section
31866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31868 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31873 \begin_inset Index idx
31876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31885 \begin_layout Standard
31886 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
31889 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31896 or the toolbar button
31899 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31902 starts the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
31903 beginning of the currently selected text.
31904 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31905 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31906 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31907 scrolled so that it is visible.
31908 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31909 n, if any could be found.
31910 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
31914 field, double-click directly invokes the replacement.
31915 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31918 \begin_layout Standard
31919 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31922 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31926 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31927 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31928 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31929 This works if you have marked the different languages appropriately and
31930 have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31931 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31934 \begin_layout Standard
31935 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
31936 \begin_inset Newline newline
31940 \begin_inset Flex URL
31943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31945 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
31951 \begin_inset Newline newline
31955 \begin_inset space ~
31958 files for each language.
31959 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
31960 \begin_inset space ~
31963 files into LyX's installation subfolder
31974 \begin_layout Subsection
31978 \begin_layout Standard
31979 In LyX's preferences dialog under
31982 \begin_inset space ~
31985 Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31988 you can set the following things:
31991 \begin_layout Description
31993 \begin_inset space ~
31996 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
31997 Depending on your platform,
32011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32012 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32013 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32028 \begin_layout Description
32030 \begin_inset space ~
32033 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32034 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32037 \begin_layout Description
32039 \begin_inset space ~
32042 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32048 \begin_inset space \space{}
32052 This should normally not be needed.
32055 \begin_layout Description
32057 \begin_inset space ~
32061 \begin_inset space ~
32064 words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32076 \begin_layout Description
32078 \begin_inset space ~
32081 continuously Check the spelling of your document as you type it.
32082 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32083 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32084 appear in the context menu.
32085 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32089 \begin_layout Description
32091 \begin_inset space ~
32095 \begin_inset space ~
32099 \begin_inset space ~
32102 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked
32106 \begin_layout Section
32108 \begin_inset Index idx
32111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32120 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32127 \begin_layout Standard
32128 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32129 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32139 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32141 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32150 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32151 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
32152 are available for many languages.
32155 \begin_layout Standard
32156 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32160 \begin_layout Subsection
32161 Setting up the thesaurus
32164 \begin_layout Standard
32172 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32177 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32182 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32188 \begin_inset space ~
32196 For instance, the US English files are named:
32199 \begin_layout Itemize
32203 \begin_layout Itemize
32207 \begin_layout Standard
32208 If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux
32209 system, these files should be already on your system.
32210 On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be
32214 \begin_layout Standard
32215 All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32216 \begin_inset Newline newline
32220 \begin_inset Flex URL
32223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32225 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
32231 \begin_inset Newline newline
32234 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
32235 \begin_inset space ~
32238 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32249 \begin_layout Subsection
32250 Using the thesaurus
32253 \begin_layout Standard
32254 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32256 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32259 or the toolbar button
32262 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32265 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32267 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32269 The proposals are grouped into categories.
32270 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32271 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32280 ), related terms (such as
32283 \begin_inset space ~
32292 ), compounds (such as
32295 \begin_inset space ~
32304 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32313 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32316 \begin_layout Standard
32317 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32318 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32322 \begin_layout Standard
32323 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32324 the dictionary, such as the above
32328 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32333 \begin_inset space \space{}
32336 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32337 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32338 For example looking up the word form
32339 \change_deleted 2090807402 1338765333
32350 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32356 \change_inserted 2090807402 1338765282
32357 The thesuarus is able to resolve inflected forms (so if you enter
32361 , it will resolve it to the form
32365 which is in the dictionary).
32366 However, this may not always work.
32367 So if you do not get any results for inflected forms, try the lemma form.
32370 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e.
32371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32375 \begin_inset space \space{}
32386 s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and
32387 also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted
32388 part will be replaced, thus the ending remains).
32391 \begin_layout Section
32393 \begin_inset Index idx
32396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32403 \begin_inset Index idx
32406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32407 Document ! Change Tracking
32413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32415 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32422 \begin_layout Standard
32423 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32424 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32425 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32426 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32428 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32430 \begin_inset space ~
32433 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32435 \begin_inset space ~
32443 \begin_layout Standard
32444 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32458 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32459 You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under
32462 \begin_inset space ~
32466 \begin_inset space ~
32476 \begin_inset Index idx
32479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32480 Color ! Change tracking
32485 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32486 the cursor is in changed text.
32487 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32490 arg "changes-merge"
32496 \begin_layout Standard
32497 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32498 \begin_inset Index idx
32501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32510 \begin_layout Standard
32511 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32517 \begin_layout Standard
32518 \begin_inset Graphics
32519 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32527 \begin_layout Standard
32528 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32535 The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
32539 \begin_layout Standard
32540 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32546 \begin_layout Standard
32547 \begin_inset Tabular
32548 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32549 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32550 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32551 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32561 arg "changes-track"
32569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32575 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32577 \begin_inset space ~
32580 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32582 \begin_inset space ~
32591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32600 arg "changes-output"
32608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32614 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32616 \begin_inset space ~
32619 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32621 \begin_inset space ~
32625 \begin_inset space ~
32629 \begin_inset space ~
32638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32659 Jumps to the next change
32665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32674 arg "change-accept"
32682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32688 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32690 \begin_inset space ~
32693 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32695 \begin_inset space ~
32704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32713 arg "change-reject"
32721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32727 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32729 \begin_inset space ~
32732 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32743 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32752 arg "changes-merge"
32760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32766 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32768 \begin_inset space ~
32771 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32773 \begin_inset space ~
32782 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32791 arg "all-changes-accept"
32799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32805 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32807 \begin_inset space ~
32810 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32812 \begin_inset space ~
32816 \begin_inset space ~
32825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32834 arg "all-changes-reject"
32842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32848 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32850 \begin_inset space ~
32853 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32855 \begin_inset space ~
32859 \begin_inset space ~
32868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32891 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32892 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32894 \begin_inset space ~
32903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32926 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32928 \begin_inset space ~
32944 \begin_layout Standard
32945 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32952 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
32953 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
32954 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
32955 the next change after the current cursor position.
32956 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
32957 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
32958 step to the next change.
32959 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32963 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
32964 to describe a change.
32967 \begin_layout Standard
32968 To show the made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package
32973 \begin_inset Index idx
32976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32977 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
32983 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
32984 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32990 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
32993 \begin_layout Section
32994 Comparison of Documents
32995 \begin_inset Index idx
32998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32999 Comparison of documents
33007 \begin_layout Standard
33008 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33010 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33014 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33016 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33017 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33021 \begin_inset space ~
33025 \begin_inset space ~
33029 \begin_inset space ~
33038 \begin_inset space ~
33042 \begin_inset space ~
33046 \begin_inset space ~
33050 \begin_inset space ~
33054 \begin_inset space ~
33058 \begin_inset space ~
33063 enables the change tracking option
33066 \begin_inset space ~
33070 \begin_inset space ~
33074 \begin_inset space ~
33079 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33082 \begin_layout Section
33083 International Support
33084 \begin_inset Index idx
33087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33088 International support
33096 \begin_layout Standard
33097 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33098 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33099 up LyX to use them:
33100 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33102 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33109 \begin_layout Standard
33110 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33111 \begin_inset space ~
33115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33117 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33124 \begin_layout Subsection
33126 \begin_inset Index idx
33129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33136 \begin_inset Index idx
33139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33140 Document ! Settings
33146 \begin_inset Index idx
33149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33150 Document ! Language
33158 \begin_layout Standard
33161 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33162 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33165 dialog lets you set
33167 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33172 \begin_layout Standard
33177 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33181 \begin_inset space ~
33186 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33187 For details about the different encoding options see section
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33194 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33201 \begin_layout Subsection
33202 Keyboard mapping configuration
33203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33205 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33212 \begin_layout Standard
33213 If you have for example a U.
33214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33217 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33218 can use an alternate keymap.
33219 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33220 use an Italian keymap.
33223 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33224 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33225 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33228 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33229 \begin_inset space ~
33233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33235 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33240 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33241 which one you want to use.
33244 \begin_layout Standard
33245 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33246 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33247 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33251 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33252 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33253 one to support the characters you want.
33254 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33261 \begin_layout Chapter
33264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33266 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33273 \begin_layout Standard
33274 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33275 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33276 topic inside the user's guide.
33279 \begin_layout Section
33281 \begin_inset Index idx
33284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33293 \begin_layout Standard
33298 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33301 \begin_layout Subsection
33305 \begin_layout Standard
33306 Creates a new document.
33309 \begin_layout Subsection
33313 \begin_layout Standard
33314 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33315 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33316 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33319 \begin_layout Subsection
33323 \begin_layout Standard
33327 \begin_layout Subsection
33331 \begin_layout Standard
33332 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33333 Click there on a file to open it.
33336 \begin_layout Subsection
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 Closes the current document.
33344 \begin_layout Subsection
33348 \begin_layout Standard
33349 Closes all opened documents.
33352 \begin_layout Subsection
33356 \begin_layout Standard
33357 Saves the actual document.
33360 \begin_layout Subsection
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33365 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33368 \begin_layout Subsection
33372 \begin_layout Standard
33373 Saves all opened documents.
33376 \begin_layout Subsection
33380 \begin_layout Standard
33381 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33384 \begin_layout Subsection
33388 \begin_layout Standard
33389 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33390 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33391 It is described in the section
33393 Version Control in LyX
33397 Additional Features
33402 \begin_layout Subsection
33406 \begin_layout Standard
33407 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33408 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33410 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33413 \begin_layout Standard
33414 When using the menu entry
33417 \begin_inset space ~
33422 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33426 \begin_inset space ~
33430 \begin_inset space ~
33435 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33436 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33439 \begin_layout Subsection
33441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33451 You can export your document to various file formats.
33452 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33453 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33454 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33457 \begin_layout Standard
33458 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33460 \begin_inset space ~
33464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33466 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
33473 \begin_layout Description
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33493 yX format of the special LyX
33494 \begin_inset space ~
33497 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33498 \begin_inset Newline newline
33501 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX.
33504 \begin_layout Description
33505 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33511 \begin_layout Description
33513 \begin_inset space ~
33516 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33522 \begin_layout Description
33523 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
33524 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33525 files paths or file names in your document.
33526 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33533 \begin_layout Description
33534 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33535 in files paths or file names
33538 \begin_layout Description
33540 \begin_inset space ~
33547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33554 eX) DVI-format using the program
33558 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
33561 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33569 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33577 \begin_layout Description
33579 \begin_inset space ~
33582 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33586 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33591 \begin_layout Description
33592 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
33596 \begin_layout Description
33598 \begin_inset space ~
33602 \begin_inset space ~
33605 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33609 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33617 \begin_layout Description
33624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33632 \begin_inset space ~
33643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33656 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33661 \begin_layout Description
33668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33676 \begin_inset space ~
33681 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
33682 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33686 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33689 \begin_layout Description
33696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33704 \begin_inset space ~
33709 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
33710 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
33718 \begin_layout Description
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33733 \begin_inset space ~
33744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33757 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33762 \begin_layout Description
33764 \begin_inset space ~
33768 \begin_inset space ~
33777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33786 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
33787 music notation software
33792 \begin_layout Description
33799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33809 \begin_inset space ~
33813 \begin_inset space ~
33816 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
33817 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
33818 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
33821 \begin_layout Description
33828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33841 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
33842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33857 represent the version number)
33860 \begin_layout Description
33867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33876 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
33879 \begin_layout Description
33880 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
33885 \begin_layout Description
33886 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
33888 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
33891 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
33895 \begin_layout Description
33899 \begin_inset space ~
33904 PDF-format using the program
33908 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
33911 \begin_layout Description
33915 \begin_inset space ~
33922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33931 PDF-format using the program
33935 , produces PDF-files directly
33938 \begin_layout Description
33942 \begin_inset space ~
33947 PDF-format using the program
33951 , produces PDF-files directly
33954 \begin_layout Description
33958 \begin_inset space ~
33963 PDF-format using the program
33967 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
33970 \begin_layout Description
33974 \begin_inset space ~
33981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33990 PDF-format using the program
33994 , produces PDF-files directly
33997 \begin_layout Description
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34009 \begin_layout Description
34013 \begin_inset space ~
34017 \begin_inset space ~
34022 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34023 and then exported as text using the program
34028 \begin_layout Description
34033 PostScript format using the program
34038 \begin_layout Description
34039 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34040 programming language
34053 it is possible to use
34060 \begin_layout Standard
34061 If one of the menu entries
34068 \begin_inset space ~
34077 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34078 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34085 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34090 \begin_inset Index idx
34093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34094 Reconfiguration of LyX
34102 \begin_layout Subsection
34106 \begin_layout Standard
34107 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34108 format or send it to a printer.
34109 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34110 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34116 For more information have a look at section
34117 \begin_inset space ~
34121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34123 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34130 \begin_layout Subsection
34134 \begin_layout Standard
34135 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34136 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34137 prefix, see section
34138 \begin_inset space ~
34142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34144 reference "sec:Paths"
34149 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34158 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34159 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34160 \begin_inset space ~
34164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34166 reference "sub:Converters"
34173 \begin_layout Subsection
34174 New and Close Window
34177 \begin_layout Standard
34178 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34181 \begin_layout Subsection
34185 \begin_layout Standard
34186 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34189 \begin_layout Section
34191 \begin_inset Index idx
34194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34203 \begin_layout Subsection
34207 \begin_layout Standard
34208 Described in section
34209 \begin_inset space ~
34213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34215 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34222 \begin_layout Subsection
34223 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34226 \begin_layout Standard
34227 Described in section
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34234 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34241 \begin_layout Subsection
34245 \begin_layout Standard
34246 Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in.
34247 If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34250 \begin_layout Subsection
34254 \begin_layout Standard
34255 Selects the whole document.
34258 \begin_layout Subsection
34259 Find & Replace (Quick)
34262 \begin_layout Standard
34263 Described in section
34264 \begin_inset space ~
34268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34270 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34277 \begin_layout Subsection
34278 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34281 \begin_layout Standard
34282 Described in section
34283 \begin_inset space ~
34287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34289 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34296 \begin_layout Subsection
34297 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34300 \begin_layout Standard
34301 This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph
34305 \begin_layout Subsection
34309 \begin_layout Standard
34310 Described in section
34311 \begin_inset space ~
34315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34317 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34324 \begin_layout Subsection
34326 \begin_inset Index idx
34329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34330 Paragraph ! Settings
34338 \begin_layout Standard
34339 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34340 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34346 have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the
34348 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34354 \begin_inset space ~
34362 \begin_layout Subsection
34363 Table Settings and Math
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34367 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34369 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34370 The properties of tables are described in section
34371 \begin_inset space ~
34375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34377 reference "sec:Tables"
34381 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34382 \begin_inset space ~
34386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34388 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34395 \begin_layout Subsection
34396 Increase / Decrease List Depth
34399 \begin_layout Standard
34400 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34402 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34403 \begin_inset space ~
34407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34409 reference "sec:Nesting"
34414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34416 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34423 \begin_layout Section
34425 \begin_inset Index idx
34428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34437 \begin_layout Standard
34438 At the bottom of the
34442 menu the opened documents are listed.
34445 \begin_layout Subsection
34446 Open/Close all Insets
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34450 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34453 \begin_layout Subsection
34454 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34457 \begin_layout Standard
34458 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34461 \begin_layout Standard
34462 Math macros are described in the
34469 \begin_layout Subsection
34473 \begin_layout Standard
34474 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34476 \begin_inset space ~
34480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34482 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34489 \begin_layout Subsection
34493 \begin_layout Standard
34494 Opens a window showing console messages.
34495 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
34496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34499 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34500 while LaTeX is processing the document.
34503 \begin_layout Subsection
34507 \begin_layout Standard
34508 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
34509 default output format either in the preferences (see sec.
34510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34516 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34520 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34527 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34531 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
34532 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
34533 \begin_inset space ~
34537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34539 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34544 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34545 The default output format is
34548 \begin_inset space ~
34556 \begin_layout Subsection
34557 View (Other Formats)
34560 \begin_layout Standard
34561 With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
34562 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
34563 actual document with an external program.
34564 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
34565 the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
34566 All possible formats are listed in section
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34573 reference "sub:Export"
34578 You should at least see the menu entry
34583 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
34584 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34585 \begin_inset space ~
34589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34591 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34596 \begin_inset Index idx
34599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34600 Reconfiguration of LyX
34608 \begin_layout Standard
34609 Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
34610 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
34611 \begin_inset space ~
34615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34617 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34622 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34625 \begin_layout Subsection
34629 \begin_layout Standard
34630 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
34631 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
34634 \begin_layout Subsection
34635 Update (Other Formats)
34638 \begin_layout Standard
34639 With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats
34640 of your document without opening a new viewer window.
34643 \begin_layout Subsection
34644 View Master Document
34647 \begin_layout Standard
34648 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
34650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34664 \begin_inset space ~
34669 manual for more information on this topic).
34670 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
34671 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
34676 generates the output of the whole book, while
34680 will just output the chapter alone.
34683 \begin_layout Standard
34684 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
34685 in the preferences (see sec.
34686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34692 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34696 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34703 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34710 \begin_layout Subsection
34711 Update Master Document
34714 \begin_layout Standard
34715 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
34717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34736 manual for more information on this topic).
34737 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
34738 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
34741 \begin_layout Standard
34742 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
34743 in the preferences (see sec.
34744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34750 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34754 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34761 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34768 \begin_layout Subsection
34772 \begin_layout Standard
34773 This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally.
34774 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
34775 to view the same document, but at different positions.
34776 You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3
34777 or more documents at the same time.
34778 To return to an unsplit view, use the menu
34785 \begin_layout Subsection
34789 \begin_layout Standard
34790 Closes a split view.
34793 \begin_layout Subsection
34797 \begin_layout Standard
34798 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
34799 so that you will see nothing but your text.
34800 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
34801 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
34802 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
34805 \begin_layout Subsection
34807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34809 name "sub:Toolbars"
34814 \begin_inset Index idx
34817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34826 \begin_layout Standard
34827 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34828 All toolbars and the
34831 \begin_inset space ~
34836 can be turned on and off.
34841 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34853 \begin_inset space ~
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34870 toolbars can be additionally set to the state
34874 that is denoted in the menu with the suffix
34881 \begin_layout Standard
34886 state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the
34890 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34891 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34892 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34893 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34894 is inside a formula or table, respectively.
34897 \begin_layout Standard
34898 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34899 \begin_inset space ~
34903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34905 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34912 \begin_layout Section
34914 \begin_inset Index idx
34917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34926 \begin_layout Subsection
34930 \begin_layout Standard
34931 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
34932 \begin_inset space ~
34936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34938 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34949 \begin_layout Subsection
34951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34953 name "sub:Special-Character"
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34961 Here you can insert the following characters:
34964 \begin_layout Description
34965 Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system.
34966 Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available
34967 characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
34968 \begin_inset Newline newline
34972 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34980 Not all characters will be visible in the
34984 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
34986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34992 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
34996 ) can display every character.
35004 \begin_layout Description
35005 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35009 \begin_layout Description
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35015 \begin_inset space ~
35018 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
35019 \begin_inset space ~
35023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35025 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35032 \begin_layout Description
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35037 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the
35040 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35050 \begin_layout Description
35052 \begin_inset space ~
35056 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809482
35058 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809484
35062 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809487
35064 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35068 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809513
35069 in the quotation marks style selected in the
35071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35083 \begin_layout Description
35085 \begin_inset space ~
35088 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35092 \begin_layout Description
35094 \begin_inset space ~
35097 Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35101 \begin_layout Description
35103 \begin_inset space ~
35106 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35110 \begin_layout Description
35112 \begin_inset space ~
35116 \begin_inset Index idx
35119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35126 \begin_inset Index idx
35129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35130 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35136 \change_deleted -712698321 1345808954
35137 Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset
35138 \change_inserted -712698321 1345808969
35139 Inserts a box where
35140 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809001
35145 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809047
35146 commands to create IPA phonetic
35149 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809189
35150 from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which
35151 provides a large set of these symbols
35155 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809068
35157 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809068
35161 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809224
35162 with traditional LaTeX
35164 you must have the LaTeX-package
35169 \begin_inset Index idx
35172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35173 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35179 \begin_inset Newline newline
35183 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809282
35185 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809283
35188 ore information about this feature
35189 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809286
35190 we refer you to the documentation of
35193 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35201 and this Wiki-page:
35202 \begin_inset Newline newline
35206 \begin_inset Flex URL
35209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35211 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX
35217 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809397
35218 can be found in the Linguistics manual (
35220 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35221 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35229 \begin_layout Subsection
35233 \begin_layout Standard
35234 Here you can insert the following format constructs:
35237 \begin_layout Description
35238 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35239 \begin_inset script superscript
35241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35250 \begin_layout Description
35251 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35252 \begin_inset script subscript
35254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35263 \begin_layout Description
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35268 Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
35269 \begin_inset space ~
35273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35275 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35282 \begin_layout Description
35284 \begin_inset space ~
35287 Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
35288 \begin_inset space ~
35292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35294 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35301 \begin_layout Description
35303 \begin_inset space ~
35306 Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35313 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35320 \begin_layout Description
35322 \begin_inset space ~
35325 Space Inserts horizontal space, see section
35326 \begin_inset space ~
35330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35332 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35339 \begin_layout Description
35341 \begin_inset space ~
35344 Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35351 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35358 \begin_layout Description
35360 \begin_inset space ~
35363 Space Inserts vertical space, see section
35364 \begin_inset space ~
35368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35370 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35377 \begin_layout Description
35378 Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section
35379 \begin_inset space ~
35383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35385 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35392 \begin_layout Description
35394 \begin_inset space ~
35397 Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section
35398 \begin_inset space ~
35402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35404 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35411 \begin_layout Description
35413 \begin_inset space ~
35416 Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
35417 \begin_inset space ~
35421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35423 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35430 \begin_layout Description
35432 \begin_inset space ~
35436 \begin_inset space ~
35439 Break Inserts a forced line break, see section
35440 \begin_inset space ~
35444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35446 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35453 \begin_layout Description
35455 \begin_inset space ~
35458 Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken
35459 text line to the page border, see section
35460 \begin_inset space ~
35464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35466 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35473 \begin_layout Description
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35478 Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35485 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35492 \begin_layout Description
35494 \begin_inset space ~
35497 Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken
35498 text page to the page border, described in section
35499 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35505 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35512 \begin_layout Description
35514 \begin_inset space ~
35517 Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section
35518 \begin_inset space ~
35522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35524 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35531 \begin_layout Description
35533 \begin_inset space ~
35537 \begin_inset space ~
35540 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
35541 \begin_inset space ~
35545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35547 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35554 \begin_layout Subsection
35558 \begin_layout Standard
35559 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35560 The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described
35562 \begin_inset space ~
35566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35568 reference "sec:toc"
35573 The index list is described in section
35574 \begin_inset space ~
35578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35580 reference "sec:Index"
35584 , the nomenclature in section
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35591 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35595 and the BibTeX bibliography in section
35596 \begin_inset space ~
35600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35602 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
35609 \begin_layout Subsection
35613 \begin_layout Standard
35614 To insert floats, described in section
35615 \begin_inset space ~
35619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35621 reference "sec:Floats"
35628 \begin_layout Subsection
35632 \begin_layout Standard
35633 To insert notes, described in section
35634 \begin_inset space ~
35638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35640 reference "sec:Notes"
35647 \begin_layout Subsection
35651 \begin_layout Standard
35652 Inserts branch insets as described in section
35653 \begin_inset space ~
35657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35659 reference "sec:Branches"
35666 \begin_layout Subsection
35670 \begin_layout Standard
35671 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35672 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35674 An example is the document class
35675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35682 with three custom insets.
35685 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35691 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35694 \begin_layout Subsection
35696 \begin_inset Index idx
35699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35708 \begin_layout Standard
35709 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35711 How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35726 \begin_layout Subsection
35728 \begin_inset Index idx
35731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35740 \begin_layout Standard
35741 Inserts a minipage box that is described section
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35748 reference "sec:Minipages"
35753 All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter
35760 \begin_inset space ~
35768 \begin_layout Subsection
35772 \begin_layout Standard
35773 Inserts a citation as described in section
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35787 \begin_layout Subsection
35791 \begin_layout Standard
35792 Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
35793 \begin_inset space ~
35797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35799 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35806 \begin_layout Subsection
35810 \begin_layout Standard
35811 Inserts a label as described in section
35812 \begin_inset space ~
35816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35818 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35825 \begin_layout Subsection
35827 \begin_inset Index idx
35830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35837 \begin_inset Index idx
35840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35841 Longtables ! Caption
35849 \begin_layout Standard
35850 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
35851 Floats are described in section
35852 \begin_inset space ~
35856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35858 reference "sec:Floats"
35862 , captions in longtables are described in the section
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35877 \begin_layout Subsection
35881 \begin_layout Standard
35882 Inserts an index entry as described in section
35883 \begin_inset space ~
35887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35889 reference "sec:Index"
35896 \begin_layout Subsection
35900 \begin_layout Standard
35901 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35908 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35915 \begin_layout Subsection
35919 \begin_layout Standard
35921 Tables are described in section
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35928 reference "sec:Tables"
35935 \begin_layout Subsection
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35941 Graphics are described in section
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35948 reference "sec:Graphics"
35955 \begin_layout Subsection
35959 \begin_layout Standard
35960 Inserts a URL as described in section
35961 \begin_inset space ~
35965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35967 reference "sub:URLs"
35974 \begin_layout Subsection
35978 \begin_layout Standard
35979 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
35980 \begin_inset space ~
35984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35986 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
35993 \begin_layout Subsection
35997 \begin_layout Standard
35998 Inserts a footnote, see section
35999 \begin_inset space ~
36003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36005 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36012 \begin_layout Subsection
36016 \begin_layout Standard
36017 Inserts a marginal note, see section
36018 \begin_inset space ~
36022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36024 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36031 \begin_layout Subsection
36035 \begin_layout Standard
36036 Inserts a short title, see section
36037 \begin_inset space ~
36041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36043 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36050 \begin_layout Subsection
36054 \begin_layout Standard
36055 Inserts a TeX Code box, see section
36056 \begin_inset space ~
36060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36062 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36069 \begin_layout Subsection
36071 \begin_inset Index idx
36074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36083 \begin_layout Standard
36084 Inserts a program listings box.
36085 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36087 Program Code Listings
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36100 \begin_layout Subsection
36104 \begin_layout Standard
36105 Inserts the actual date.
36106 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36108 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36124 \begin_layout Subsection
36128 \begin_layout Standard
36129 Inserts a preview inset, see section
36130 \begin_inset space ~
36134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36136 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36143 \begin_layout Section
36145 \begin_inset Index idx
36148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36157 \begin_layout Standard
36158 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36162 of the current document.
36163 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36166 \begin_layout Subsection
36170 \begin_layout Standard
36171 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36172 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36178 \begin_inset space \space{}
36182 \begin_inset space ~
36186 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36187 \begin_inset space ~
36190 2.5 and use the submenu
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset space ~
36210 \begin_inset space ~
36214 \begin_inset space ~
36220 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36224 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36230 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36236 \begin_layout Standard
36237 You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36238 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36241 \begin_layout Subsection
36242 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36245 \begin_layout Standard
36246 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current
36250 \begin_layout Subsection
36254 \begin_layout Standard
36255 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36256 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36257 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36261 \begin_inset space ~
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36273 \begin_layout Subsection
36277 \begin_layout Standard
36278 This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part
36279 in the output, see section
36282 \begin_inset space ~
36290 \begin_inset space ~
36295 manual for a detailed description.
36298 \begin_layout Section
36300 \begin_inset Index idx
36303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36312 \begin_layout Subsection
36316 \begin_layout Standard
36317 Change Tracking is described in section
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36324 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36331 \begin_layout Subsection
36336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36346 \begin_layout Standard
36347 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36349 It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program.
36352 \begin_layout Standard
36353 Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background.
36358 will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36361 \begin_layout Subsection
36365 \begin_layout Standard
36366 Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36373 reference "sec:Navigating"
36378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36380 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
36387 \begin_layout Subsection
36388 Start Appendix Here
36391 \begin_layout Standard
36392 This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
36393 position as described in section
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36400 reference "sec:Appendices"
36407 \begin_layout Subsection
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 Un/compresses the current document.
36415 \begin_layout Subsection
36419 \begin_layout Standard
36420 The document settings are described in appendix
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36427 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
36434 \begin_layout Section
36436 \begin_inset Index idx
36439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36448 \begin_layout Subsection
36452 \begin_layout Standard
36453 Spell checking is explained in section
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36460 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
36467 \begin_layout Subsection
36471 \begin_layout Standard
36472 The thesaurus is described in section
36473 \begin_inset space ~
36477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36479 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
36486 \begin_layout Subsection
36488 \begin_inset Index idx
36491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36498 \begin_inset Index idx
36501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36510 \begin_layout Standard
36511 Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted
36515 \begin_layout Subsection
36517 \begin_inset Index idx
36520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 \begin_layout Standard
36530 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
36534 \begin_layout Subsection
36536 \begin_inset Index idx
36539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36540 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
36544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36551 Reconfiguration of LyX
36555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36568 \begin_inset Index idx
36571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36572 Reconfiguration of LyX
36580 \begin_layout Standard
36581 This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages
36582 and programs it needs; see also section
36583 \begin_inset space ~
36587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36589 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36596 \begin_layout Subsection
36600 \begin_layout Standard
36601 The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix
36602 \begin_inset space ~
36606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36608 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
36615 \begin_layout Section
36617 \begin_inset Index idx
36620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36629 \begin_layout Standard
36630 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
36632 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
36636 \begin_layout Standard
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36645 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
36646 found by LyX (see also section
36647 \begin_inset space ~
36651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36653 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
36660 \begin_layout Section
36662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36664 name "sec:Toolbars"
36671 \begin_layout Standard
36672 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
36673 \begin_inset space ~
36677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36679 reference "sub:Toolbars"
36686 \begin_layout Standard
36687 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
36688 This is described in the
36690 Additional Features
36695 \begin_layout Subsection
36697 \begin_inset Index idx
36700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36709 \begin_layout Standard
36710 \begin_inset Graphics
36711 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
36719 \begin_layout Standard
36720 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36726 \begin_layout Standard
36727 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
36732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36744 \begin_inset Note Note
36747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36748 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
36753 manual for more information.
36761 \begin_layout Standard
36762 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36768 \begin_layout Standard
36769 \begin_inset Tabular
36770 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
36771 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36772 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
36773 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
36775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36779 \begin_inset Graphics
36780 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
36790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36794 pull-down box for the environments
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
36814 \begin_layout Standard
36816 \begin_inset Tabular
36817 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
36818 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36819 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
36820 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
36821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36844 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36874 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36904 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36920 arg "dialog-show print"
36928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36934 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36950 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36964 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36994 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37024 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37054 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37084 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37114 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37130 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37144 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37170 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37184 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37212 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37226 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37227 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37255 Emphasize text, function of the
37257 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37259 \begin_inset space ~
37262 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37292 Set text to noun style, function of the
37294 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37299 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37317 arg "textstyle-apply"
37325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37329 Format text using the current settings in the
37331 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37336 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37368 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37369 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37389 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
37397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37403 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37417 arg "tabular-insert"
37425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37431 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37438 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37447 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
37455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37459 Toggle outline window on/off,
37461 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37477 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
37485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37489 Toggle math toolbar on/off
37495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37504 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
37512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37516 Toggle table toolbar on/off
37529 \begin_layout Subsection
37531 \begin_inset Index idx
37534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37543 \begin_layout Standard
37544 \begin_inset Graphics
37545 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37560 \begin_layout Standard
37561 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37566 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37572 \begin_layout Standard
37573 \begin_inset Tabular
37574 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
37575 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37576 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
37577 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
37578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37614 arg "layout Enumerate"
37622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37641 arg "layout Itemize"
37649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37695 arg "layout Description"
37703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37722 arg "depth-increment"
37730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37736 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37742 \begin_inset space ~
37751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37760 arg "depth-decrement"
37768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37774 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37776 \begin_inset space ~
37780 \begin_inset space ~
37789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37798 arg "float-insert figure"
37806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37812 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37813 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37829 arg "float-insert table"
37837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37843 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37844 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37874 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37890 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
37898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37904 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37920 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
37928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37934 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37966 \begin_inset space ~
37975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37984 arg "nomencl-insert"
37992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37998 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38000 \begin_inset space ~
38009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38018 arg "footnote-insert"
38026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38032 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38048 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38062 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38064 \begin_inset space ~
38073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38096 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38097 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38110 \begin_inset space ~
38119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38128 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38142 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38172 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38202 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38219 \begin_inset space ~
38228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38237 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38251 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38252 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38268 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38282 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38283 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38294 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38303 arg "dialog-show character"
38311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38317 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38322 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38338 arg "layout-paragraph"
38346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38352 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38354 \begin_inset space ~
38363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38372 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38386 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38400 \begin_layout Subsection
38401 View/Update Toolbar
38402 \begin_inset Index idx
38405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38406 Toolbar ! View / Update
38414 \begin_layout Standard
38415 \begin_inset Graphics
38416 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
38423 \begin_layout Standard
38424 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38430 \begin_layout Standard
38431 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38435 \begin_layout Standard
38436 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38442 \begin_layout Standard
38443 \begin_inset Tabular
38444 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
38445 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38446 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
38447 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
38448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38471 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38487 arg "buffer-update"
38495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38501 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38517 arg "master-buffer-view"
38525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38531 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38533 \begin_inset space ~
38542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38551 arg "master-buffer-update"
38559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38567 \begin_inset space ~
38571 \begin_inset space ~
38580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38589 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
38597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38603 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38604 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38605 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38606 Synchronize with Output
38612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 \begin_inset Graphics
38618 filename ../images/view-others.png
38620 groupId toolbarbuttons
38631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38637 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38638 View (Other Formats)
38644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38649 \begin_inset Graphics
38650 filename ../images/update-others.png
38652 groupId toolbarbuttons
38661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38667 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38668 Update (Other Formats)
38681 \begin_layout Standard
38682 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
38686 \begin_layout Subsection
38690 \begin_layout Standard
38691 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
38692 \begin_inset space ~
38696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38698 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38702 , the table toolbar
38703 \begin_inset Index idx
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38720 manual and the math macro toolbar
38721 \begin_inset Index idx
38724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38737 \begin_layout Chapter
38738 The Document Settings
38739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38741 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38746 \begin_inset Index idx
38749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 Document ! Settings
38758 \begin_layout Standard
38759 The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the
38760 whole document and is called with the menu
38762 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38766 You can save your document settings as default with the
38768 Save as Document Defaults
38770 button in the dialog.
38771 This will create a template named
38775 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
38779 \begin_layout Standard
38784 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
38785 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
38788 \begin_layout Standard
38789 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
38792 \begin_layout Section
38796 \begin_layout Standard
38797 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
38799 Document classes are described in section
38800 \begin_inset space ~
38804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38806 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
38814 \begin_layout Standard
38818 \begin_inset space ~
38823 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
38827 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class.
38828 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
38830 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
38839 \begin_layout Standard
38840 Some classes use special class options by default.
38841 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
38845 and you can decide to use them or not.
38846 If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is
38847 recommended to leave them untouched.
38852 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
38857 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
38858 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
38863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38864 When you want to use one of the following drivers
38865 \begin_inset Newline newline
38870 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
38873 \begin_inset Newline newline
38876 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
38882 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38884 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
38896 \begin_layout Standard
38897 Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child
38899 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
38900 document is opened without its master.
38901 This way child documents are always compilable.
38902 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
38909 \begin_inset space ~
38917 \begin_layout Standard
38918 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
38928 \begin_inset Index idx
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38932 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
38938 \begin_inset Index idx
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
38947 for cross-references, see sec.
38948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38954 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38961 \begin_layout Section
38965 \begin_layout Standard
38966 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
38967 Please refer to the section
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38978 \begin_inset space ~
38983 manual for details.
38986 \begin_layout Section
38990 \begin_layout Standard
38991 Modules are explained in section
38992 \begin_inset space ~
38996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38998 reference "sub:Modules"
39005 \begin_layout Section
39009 \begin_layout Standard
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39017 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
39024 \begin_layout Section
39028 \begin_layout Standard
39029 The document font settings are described in section
39030 \begin_inset space ~
39034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39036 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39043 \begin_layout Section
39047 \begin_layout Standard
39048 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical
39050 The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here.
39053 \begin_layout Standard
39054 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen.
39055 That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39057 However, it will be as you specified it in the output.
39060 \begin_layout Section
39064 \begin_layout Standard
39065 A description of this menu is given in section
39066 \begin_inset space ~
39070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39072 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39079 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
39086 \begin_layout Section
39090 \begin_layout Standard
39091 Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
39092 \begin_inset space ~
39096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39098 reference "sub:Margins"
39105 \begin_layout Section
39107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39109 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39114 \begin_inset Index idx
39117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39118 Language ! Encoding
39126 \begin_layout Standard
39127 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39128 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
39129 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
39130 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39131 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
39132 known for a particular character).
39136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39137 The known commands are defined in a text file (
39142 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
39147 manual for details.
39155 \begin_layout Standard
39156 If you use the option
39160 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39161 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39162 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
39163 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39164 exactly one encoding.
39165 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39168 \begin_layout Standard
39169 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39170 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39171 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
39172 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39173 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
39174 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39179 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
39180 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
39181 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39182 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
39183 engines to standard LaTeX.
39184 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39185 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39188 \begin_inset space ~
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39207 \begin_inset space ~
39214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39226 \begin_inset space ~
39232 \begin_inset space ~
39236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39238 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
39243 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
39247 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
39250 \begin_layout Standard
39254 \begin_inset space ~
39259 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
39261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39269 The possible settings are:
39272 \begin_layout Description
39273 Default uses the language package that is selected in
39275 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39276 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39280 \begin_inset space ~
39284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39286 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
39293 \begin_layout Description
39294 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
39295 format you will use.
39296 In many cases this will be
39301 \begin_inset Index idx
39304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39305 LaTeX-packages ! babel
39311 If the newer package
39316 \begin_inset Index idx
39319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39320 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
39325 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
39326 this package will be used instead of
39333 \begin_layout Description
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39346 would be more appropriate.
39349 \begin_layout Description
39350 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
39351 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
39355 (for German texts), type in
39358 \begin_inset Newline newline
39363 usepackage{ngerman}
39366 \begin_layout Description
39367 None will not use a language package.
39368 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
39371 \begin_layout Standard
39372 Here is a list with the important encodings:
39375 \begin_layout Description
39377 \begin_inset space ~
39381 \begin_inset space ~
39385 \begin_inset space ~
39392 , but the LaTeX-package
39397 \begin_inset Index idx
39400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39401 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
39407 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
39408 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
39409 languages in TeX code.
39412 \begin_layout Description
39413 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
39414 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
39415 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
39418 \begin_layout Description
39420 \begin_inset space ~
39424 \begin_inset space ~
39427 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
39430 \begin_layout Description
39432 \begin_inset space ~
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39439 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
39442 \begin_layout Description
39444 \begin_inset space ~
39447 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
39450 \begin_layout Description
39452 \begin_inset space ~
39456 \begin_inset space ~
39459 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
39460 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
39463 \begin_layout Description
39465 \begin_inset space ~
39469 \begin_inset space ~
39472 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
39476 \begin_layout Description
39478 \begin_inset space ~
39482 \begin_inset space ~
39485 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
39486 ISO-8859-13 encoding
39489 \begin_layout Description
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39495 \begin_inset space ~
39499 \begin_inset space ~
39502 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39509 \begin_layout Description
39511 \begin_inset space ~
39515 \begin_inset space ~
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39522 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
39523 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
39526 \begin_layout Description
39528 \begin_inset space ~
39532 \begin_inset space ~
39535 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
39536 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
39537 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39542 \begin_inset space ~
39548 \begin_layout Description
39550 \begin_inset space ~
39554 \begin_inset space ~
39557 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
39558 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
39559 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
39560 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39565 \begin_inset space ~
39571 \begin_layout Description
39573 \begin_inset space ~
39577 \begin_inset space ~
39580 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
39583 \begin_layout Description
39585 \begin_inset space ~
39589 \begin_inset space ~
39592 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
39595 \begin_layout Description
39597 \begin_inset space ~
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39604 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
39607 \begin_layout Description
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39612 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
39615 \begin_layout Description
39617 \begin_inset space ~
39620 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
39623 \begin_layout Description
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_inset space ~
39632 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
39635 \begin_layout Description
39637 \begin_inset space ~
39641 \begin_inset space ~
39647 \begin_layout Description
39649 \begin_inset space ~
39653 \begin_inset space ~
39656 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
39659 \begin_layout Description
39661 \begin_inset space ~
39665 \begin_inset space ~
39671 \begin_layout Description
39673 \begin_inset space ~
39677 \begin_inset space ~
39680 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39685 \begin_inset Index idx
39688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39689 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
39694 , when using this, set the document language to
39699 \begin_layout Description
39701 \begin_inset space ~
39705 \begin_inset space ~
39708 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39712 , when using this, set the document language to
39715 \begin_inset space ~
39721 \begin_layout Description
39723 \begin_inset space ~
39727 \begin_inset space ~
39730 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39735 \begin_inset Index idx
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
39744 , when using this, set the document language to
39749 \begin_layout Description
39751 \begin_inset space ~
39755 \begin_inset space ~
39758 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39762 , when using this, set the document language to
39767 \begin_layout Description
39769 \begin_inset space ~
39773 \begin_inset space ~
39776 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39780 , when using this, set the document language to
39785 \begin_layout Description
39787 \begin_inset space ~
39790 (EUC-KR) for Korean
39793 \begin_layout Description
39795 \begin_inset space ~
39799 \begin_inset space ~
39803 \begin_inset space ~
39806 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
39809 \begin_layout Description
39811 \begin_inset space ~
39815 \begin_inset space ~
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39822 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
39823 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
39824 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
39827 \begin_layout Description
39829 \begin_inset space ~
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39839 \begin_layout Description
39841 \begin_inset space ~
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39848 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
39849 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
39852 \begin_layout Description
39854 \begin_inset space ~
39858 \begin_inset space ~
39861 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
39866 \begin_inset Index idx
39869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39870 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
39875 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
39878 \begin_layout Description
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39884 \begin_inset space ~
39887 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
39895 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
39900 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
39902 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
39905 \begin_layout Description
39907 \begin_inset space ~
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39914 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
39919 \begin_inset Index idx
39922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39923 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
39928 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
39931 \begin_layout Description
39933 \begin_inset space ~
39936 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
39941 \begin_inset Index idx
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39945 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
39951 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
39955 \begin_layout Description
39957 \begin_inset space ~
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39968 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
39969 \begin_inset space ~
39975 \begin_layout Description
39977 \begin_inset space ~
39981 \begin_inset space ~
39985 \begin_inset space ~
39988 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
39989 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
39990 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
39994 \begin_layout Description
39996 \begin_inset space ~
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40007 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40008 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40011 \begin_layout Standard
40012 Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the
40015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40021 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40025 for more information on the language package.
40028 \begin_layout Section
40030 \begin_inset Index idx
40033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40040 \begin_inset Index idx
40043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40052 \begin_layout Standard
40053 Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40058 out notes (default: light grey).
40063 sets the color back to the default.
40066 \begin_layout Standard
40067 You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white)
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40072 boxes (default: red).
40075 \begin_layout Standard
40076 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40080 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
40082 \begin_inset space ~
40085 out note appears blue in the output.)
40093 \begin_layout Standard
40094 Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40102 in the document settings under
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40110 , you probably also need to change the link font color by using
40113 \begin_inset space ~
40121 \begin_inset space ~
40127 For example the option
40130 \begin_layout Standard
40136 \begin_layout Standard
40137 sets the link text color to black.
40138 For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package
40143 \begin_inset Index idx
40146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40147 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
40153 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40162 \begin_layout Standard
40163 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40169 \begin_layout Standard
40170 You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every
40171 page in your document if you use these commands as TeX
40172 \begin_inset space ~
40175 Code behind a forced page break:
40178 \begin_layout Itemize
40179 For the page color:
40180 \begin_inset Newline newline
40187 pagecolor{color name}
40190 \begin_layout Itemize
40191 For the text color:
40192 \begin_inset Newline newline
40202 \begin_layout Standard
40203 The color name can hereby be one of these:
40236 \begin_inset Newline newline
40239 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the
40243 \begin_layout Itemize
40244 For the page background color:
40245 \begin_inset Newline newline
40250 page_backgroundcolor
40253 \begin_layout Itemize
40254 For the main text color:
40255 \begin_inset Newline newline
40263 \begin_layout Itemize
40265 \begin_inset space ~
40268 box background color:
40269 \begin_inset Newline newline
40277 \begin_layout Itemize
40279 \begin_inset space ~
40282 out note text color:
40283 \begin_inset Newline newline
40291 \begin_layout Standard
40292 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40311 \begin_layout Section
40315 \begin_layout Standard
40316 Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section
40317 depth in the table of contents as described in section
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40324 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
40331 \begin_layout Section
40335 \begin_layout Standard
40336 Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages
40341 \begin_inset Index idx
40344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40345 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
40355 \begin_inset Index idx
40358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40359 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
40365 You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package
40370 \begin_inset Index idx
40373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40374 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
40379 and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being
40381 For a further description see section
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40388 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40395 \begin_layout Section
40399 \begin_layout Standard
40400 Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated
40401 and you can define additional indexes.
40402 Please refer to section
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40409 reference "sec:Index"
40416 \begin_layout Section
40420 \begin_layout Standard
40421 The PDF properties are explained in section
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40428 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40435 \begin_layout Section
40439 \begin_layout Standard
40440 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
40445 \begin_inset Index idx
40448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40449 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
40459 \begin_inset Index idx
40462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40463 LaTeX-packages ! esint
40473 \begin_inset Index idx
40476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40477 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
40487 \begin_inset Index idx
40490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40491 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
40496 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
40499 \begin_layout Description
40500 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
40501 ensure that you have enabled
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40512 \begin_layout Description
40513 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40528 \begin_layout Description
40529 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
40540 \begin_layout Description
40541 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
40543 Chemical Symbols and Equations
40552 \begin_layout Section
40556 \begin_layout Standard
40557 The float placement options are described in section
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40568 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_layout Section
40580 \begin_layout Standard
40581 The listings settings are explained in chapter
40583 Program Code Listings
40588 \begin_inset space ~
40596 \begin_layout Section
40600 \begin_layout Standard
40601 Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
40602 The itemize environment is described in section
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40609 reference "sec:Itemize"
40616 \begin_layout Section
40620 \begin_layout Standard
40621 Branches are described in section
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40628 reference "sec:Branches"
40635 \begin_layout Section
40637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40639 name "sec:Doc-Output"
40646 \begin_layout Standard
40647 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
40650 \begin_layout Description
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40659 Format: The format that is used when you hit
40660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40679 View Master Document
40680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40687 Update Master Document
40688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40695 menu or the toolbar.
40696 The default is set in
40698 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40699 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40709 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40716 \begin_layout Description
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40725 Output settings for the menu
40727 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40729 \begin_inset space ~
40735 For a detailed description see section
40737 Reverse DVI/PDF search
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40750 \begin_layout Description
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40759 Options settings for the export format
40767 \begin_inset space ~
40772 will assure that the output follows exactly version
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40776 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
40780 \begin_inset space ~
40785 settings are described in detail in section
40787 Math Output in XHTML
40792 \begin_inset space ~
40798 The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output.
40801 \begin_layout Section
40806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40816 \begin_layout Standard
40817 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
40818 or to define LaTeX-commands.
40819 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
40820 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
40824 \begin_layout Standard
40825 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40832 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
40839 \begin_layout Chapter
40845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40847 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40852 \begin_inset Index idx
40855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40864 \begin_layout Standard
40865 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
40867 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40871 It has the following submenus.
40874 \begin_layout Section
40878 \begin_layout Subsection
40882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40883 User Interface File
40884 \begin_inset Index idx
40887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40888 Customization ! of toolbars
40894 \begin_inset Index idx
40897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40898 Customization ! of menus
40906 \begin_layout Standard
40907 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
40908 interface (ui) file.
40909 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
40917 \begin_layout Description
40922 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
40925 \begin_layout Description
40932 the menu entries in popup context menus
40935 \begin_layout Description
40940 specifies the toolbar buttons
40943 \begin_layout Standard
40944 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
40945 and edit the entries.
40948 \begin_layout Standard
40949 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
40961 entries must be finished with an explicit
40986 and in the case of the
40987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40999 The syntax for the entries is:
41002 \begin_layout Standard
41003 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41031 \begin_layout Standard
41033 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41036 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
41038 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41059 \begin_layout Standard
41060 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
41066 \begin_layout Standard
41067 For example, assuming you use the menu
41069 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41072 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
41076 \begin_layout Standard
41077 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41101 \begin_layout Standard
41103 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41118 to have the sixth bookmark.
41121 \begin_layout Standard
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41130 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
41131 The currently available icon sets are compared in
41132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41135 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
41142 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41146 \begin_layout Standard
41149 Enable tool tips in main work area
41151 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
41155 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41159 \begin_layout Standard
41162 Restore window layouts and geometries
41164 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
41165 in the last LyX session.
41168 \begin_layout Standard
41171 Restore cursor positions
41173 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
41177 \begin_layout Standard
41180 Load opened files from last session
41182 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
41185 \begin_layout Standard
41188 Clear all session information
41190 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
41191 of last opened documents, etc.).
41194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41198 name "sub:Backup documents"
41203 \begin_inset Index idx
41206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41215 \begin_layout Standard
41218 Backup original documents when saving
41220 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
41221 it was saved the last time.
41222 It is stored in the
41225 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41237 reference "sec:Paths"
41241 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41250 The backup file has the file extension
41251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41265 \begin_layout Standard
41268 Backup documents, every
41270 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
41273 \begin_layout Standard
41276 Save documents compressed by default
41278 always saves files in a compressed format.
41281 \begin_layout Standard
41286 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
41289 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_layout Standard
41305 Open documents in tabs
41307 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
41310 \begin_layout Standard
41315 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
41319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41327 reference "sec:Paths"
41331 for information about LyXServer pipes.
41337 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
41339 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
41342 \begin_layout Standard
41345 Single close-tab button
41347 is checked, there will only be one close button (
41350 \begin_inset Graphics
41351 filename ../images/closetab.png
41358 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
41359 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
41362 \begin_layout Standard
41363 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
41379 \begin_layout Subsection
41381 \begin_inset Index idx
41384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41393 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
41400 \begin_layout Standard
41401 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
41404 \begin_layout Standard
41405 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41413 This section only deals with the fonts
41418 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
41421 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41422 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41433 \begin_layout Standard
41434 By default, LyX uses
41450 (depends on the system) as its
41453 \begin_inset space ~
41469 \begin_layout Standard
41470 You can change the font size with the
41477 \begin_layout Standard
41482 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
41484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41487 points have the size of 1
41488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41492 \begin_inset space ~
41496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41498 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
41503 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
41504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41508 The sizes are explained in detail in section
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41515 reference "sub:Document-Font"
41522 \begin_layout Standard
41525 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
41527 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
41528 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
41529 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
41530 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
41532 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
41533 \begin_inset space ~
41539 \begin_layout Subsection
41541 \begin_inset Index idx
41544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 \begin_inset Index idx
41554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41563 \begin_layout Standard
41564 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
41565 the list and selecting the
41572 \begin_layout Standard
41573 By checking the option
41577 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
41580 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41585 \begin_inset space ~
41590 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
41593 \begin_layout Subsection
41595 \begin_inset Index idx
41598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41607 \begin_layout Standard
41608 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
41611 \begin_layout Standard
41616 enables previewing snippets of your document.
41617 This feature is described in section
41618 \begin_inset space ~
41622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41624 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41631 \begin_layout Standard
41632 Checking the option
41635 \begin_inset space ~
41639 \begin_inset space ~
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41648 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
41651 \begin_layout Section
41653 \begin_inset Index idx
41656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41665 \begin_layout Subsection
41669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41673 \begin_layout Standard
41676 Cursor follows scrollbar
41678 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
41682 \begin_layout Standard
41683 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
41684 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
41685 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
41688 \begin_layout Standard
41691 Scroll below end of document
41693 is self-explanatory.
41696 \begin_layout Standard
41697 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
41704 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
41706 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
41707 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
41710 \begin_layout Standard
41713 Sort environments alphabetically
41715 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
41718 \begin_layout Standard
41721 Group environments by their category
41723 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
41726 \begin_layout Standard
41731 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
41742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41746 \begin_layout Standard
41747 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
41752 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
41753 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
41757 \begin_layout Subsection
41759 \begin_inset Index idx
41762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41769 \begin_inset Index idx
41772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41773 Settings ! Shortcuts
41781 \begin_layout Standard
41786 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
41787 Several binding files are available, among them:
41790 \begin_layout Description
41791 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
41794 \begin_layout Description
41795 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
41807 \begin_layout Description
41808 mac.bind a set of bindings for
41811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41819 \begin_layout Standard
41820 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
41825 , and binding files for special languages.
41826 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
41827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41831 \begin_inset space \space{}
41835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41843 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
41847 \begin_layout Standard
41848 Some binding files, like
41852 , only have a limited scope.
41853 When looking at the end of the file
41857 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
41860 \begin_layout Standard
41864 \begin_inset space ~
41872 \begin_inset space ~
41877 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
41878 in the selected key binding file.
41881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41885 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
41890 \begin_inset Index idx
41893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41894 Key Bindings ! Editing
41902 \begin_layout Standard
41903 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
41904 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
41905 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
41908 Show key-bindings containing
41911 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
41912 Insert there for example as keyword
41913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41920 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
41921 functions that contain
41922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41930 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
41931 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
41935 that you will find in the
41942 \begin_layout Standard
41943 For example, to add the shortcut
41951 , select the function and press the
41956 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
41957 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
41960 \begin_layout Standard
41961 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
41962 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
41963 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
41964 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
41965 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
41970 \begin_layout Standard
41971 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
41974 \begin_layout Standard
41975 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
41977 The syntax of the entries is:
41980 \begin_layout Standard
41986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42004 \begin_layout Subsection
42006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42008 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
42013 \begin_inset Index idx
42016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42023 \begin_inset Index idx
42026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42027 Settings ! Keyboard Map
42035 \begin_layout Standard
42036 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
42037 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
42038 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
42039 is a Romanian one, you can enable
42042 \begin_inset space ~
42046 \begin_inset space ~
42051 and select the keyboard map file named
42058 \begin_layout Standard
42067 keyboard map and, if you use the
42071 bindings, you can select the first and second with
42074 arg "keymap-primary"
42080 arg "keymap-secondary"
42083 respectively or toggle between them with
42086 arg "keymap-toggle"
42092 \begin_layout Standard
42093 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42101 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
42110 \begin_layout Standard
42111 You can also specify the mouse
42113 Wheel scrolling speed
42116 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
42120 \begin_layout Standard
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42137 you can select a key for zooming.
42138 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
42141 \begin_layout Subsection
42145 \begin_layout Standard
42146 Input completion is described in section
42147 \begin_inset space ~
42151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42153 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
42160 \begin_layout Section
42162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42169 \begin_inset Index idx
42172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42179 \begin_inset Index idx
42182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42191 \begin_layout Standard
42192 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
42194 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
42197 \begin_layout Description
42199 \begin_inset space ~
42202 directory This is LyX's working directory.
42203 It is the default when you
42214 \begin_inset space ~
42222 \begin_layout Description
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42227 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
42229 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42231 \begin_inset space ~
42235 \begin_inset space ~
42243 \begin_layout Description
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42248 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
42254 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42258 \begin_inset Newline newline
42262 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
42282 \begin_layout Description
42284 \begin_inset space ~
42288 \begin_inset Index idx
42291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42297 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
42298 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
42299 \begin_inset space ~
42303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42305 reference "sub:Backup documents"
42313 will be used to save the backups.
42314 \begin_inset Newline newline
42317 Backup files have the ending
42318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42328 \begin_layout Description
42333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42341 \begin_inset space ~
42344 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
42345 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
42346 \begin_inset Newline newline
42353 You add a BibTeX-database
42358 You can edit this file with the program
42367 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
42370 \begin_inset space ~
42376 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
42381 and click on the LyX-symbol.
42382 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
42388 and LyX need to be running the same time.
42389 \begin_inset Newline newline
42392 The pipe is also used for the
42401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42407 reference "sub:Backup documents"
42412 \begin_inset Newline newline
42415 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
42416 \begin_inset Newline newline
42432 \begin_layout Description
42434 \begin_inset space ~
42437 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
42440 \begin_layout Description
42442 \begin_inset space ~
42445 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
42446 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
42447 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
42450 \begin_layout Description
42452 \begin_inset space ~
42455 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
42461 You only need to specify it if you are using
42465 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
42471 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
42475 \begin_layout Description
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42480 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
42481 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
42482 where to find it on the system.
42483 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
42484 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
42486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42493 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
42494 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
42497 \begin_layout Description
42499 \begin_inset space ~
42502 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
42503 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
42505 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
42507 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
42508 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
42509 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
42510 scanned for the input files.
42511 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
42512 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
42513 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
42514 compilation may fail for some documents.
42517 \begin_layout Section
42521 \begin_layout Standard
42522 Here you can insert your
42531 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42539 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42543 , to mark changes you make as yours.
42546 \begin_layout Section
42548 \begin_inset Index idx
42551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42552 Language ! Settings
42558 \begin_inset Index idx
42561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 Settings ! Language
42570 \begin_layout Subsection
42572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42574 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
42581 \begin_layout Description
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42587 \begin_inset space ~
42590 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
42591 You can find its actual translation status here:
42592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42594 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
42601 \begin_layout Description
42603 \begin_inset space ~
42606 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
42608 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
42609 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
42610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42626 The most widespread language package is
42631 \begin_inset Index idx
42634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 LaTeX-packages ! babel
42640 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
42641 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
42642 alternative language package
42647 \begin_inset Index idx
42650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
42656 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
42657 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
42663 The available selections are described in section
42664 \begin_inset space ~
42668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42670 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
42677 \begin_layout Description
42679 \begin_inset space ~
42682 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
42683 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
42684 An example is the start command
42690 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
42695 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42710 selectlanguage{$$lang}
42715 \begin_layout Description
42717 \begin_inset space ~
42725 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
42726 command toggles the package on and off.
42729 \begin_layout Description
42731 \begin_inset space ~
42735 \begin_inset space ~
42738 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
42742 \begin_layout Description
42744 \begin_inset space ~
42748 \begin_inset space ~
42751 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
42752 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
42753 used by all LaTeX-packages.
42754 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
42761 \begin_layout Description
42763 \begin_inset space ~
42766 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
42768 When this option is not set, the
42771 \begin_inset space ~
42776 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
42777 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
42780 \begin_inset space ~
42788 \begin_layout Description
42790 \begin_inset space ~
42796 \begin_inset space ~
42802 When it is not set, the
42805 \begin_inset space ~
42810 is set to the end of the document.
42813 \begin_layout Description
42815 \begin_inset space ~
42819 \begin_inset space ~
42822 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
42823 language will be underlined in blue.
42826 \begin_layout Description
42828 \begin_inset space ~
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42835 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
42836 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
42839 \begin_layout Description
42841 \begin_inset space ~
42844 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
42845 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
42846 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
42847 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
42850 \begin_layout Subsection
42854 \begin_layout Standard
42855 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42862 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42869 \begin_layout Section
42873 \begin_layout Subsection
42877 \begin_layout Description
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42883 \begin_inset space ~
42886 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
42889 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42890 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42898 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
42901 \begin_layout Description
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42907 \begin_inset Index idx
42910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42917 \begin_inset Index idx
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42921 Settings ! Date format
42926 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
42927 \begin_inset Newline newline
42931 \begin_inset Flex URL
42934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42936 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
42942 \begin_inset Newline newline
42945 For example the format
42946 \begin_inset Newline newline
42950 \begin_inset Newline newline
42953 prints the date as day/month/year.
42956 \begin_layout Description
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42962 \begin_inset space ~
42965 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
42968 \begin_layout Description
42970 \begin_inset space ~
42973 search Commands that will be used for the menu
42975 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42977 \begin_inset space ~
42983 For a detailed description see section
42985 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42990 \begin_inset space ~
42998 \begin_layout Subsection
43000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43007 \begin_inset Index idx
43010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43017 \begin_inset Index idx
43020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43029 \begin_layout Description
43031 \begin_inset space ~
43034 printer Here you can specify the name of your
43039 The name will be used when the
43044 \begin_inset Newline newline
43048 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43056 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
43064 \begin_layout Description
43066 \begin_inset space ~
43069 command is the command LyX
43070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43077 LaTeX uses for printing.
43085 \begin_layout Description
43087 \begin_inset space ~
43091 \begin_inset space ~
43094 Options Here you can specify printer options.
43095 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
43096 of the program that provides the
43103 \begin_layout Description
43105 \begin_inset space ~
43109 \begin_inset space ~
43113 \begin_inset space ~
43116 printer This option works only for the
43121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43133 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
43134 This is an option only for dvips experts.
43137 \begin_layout Subsection
43142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43152 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
43157 \begin_inset Index idx
43160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43169 \begin_layout Description
43171 \begin_inset space ~
43178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43193 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
43198 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
43219 are used for Cyrillic.
43220 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
43221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43233 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
43234 LyX sets up in the background.
43235 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
43238 \begin_layout Description
43240 \begin_inset space ~
43244 \begin_inset space ~
43247 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
43252 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
43255 \begin_layout Description
43257 \begin_inset space ~
43261 \begin_inset space ~
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43269 \begin_inset space ~
43272 options They only have an effect when the program
43276 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
43279 \begin_layout Standard
43280 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
43281 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
43282 manuals of the applications.
43285 \begin_layout Description
43287 \begin_inset space ~
43290 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
43291 \begin_inset space ~
43295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43297 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
43304 \begin_layout Description
43306 \begin_inset space ~
43309 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
43310 \begin_inset space ~
43314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43316 reference "sub:Index-Program"
43323 \begin_layout Description
43325 \begin_inset space ~
43328 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
43329 \begin_inset space ~
43333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43335 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
43342 \begin_layout Description
43347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43355 \begin_inset space ~
43358 command Command for the program
43362 that is described in the section
43368 Additional Features
43373 \begin_layout Standard
43374 There are additionally the following options:
43377 \begin_layout Description
43379 \begin_inset space ~
43383 \begin_inset space ~
43387 \begin_inset space ~
43391 \begin_inset space ~
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43398 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
43399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43416 to separate folders.
43417 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
43418 \begin_inset Index idx
43421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43428 \begin_inset Index idx
43431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43440 \begin_layout Description
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43450 \begin_inset space ~
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43465 changes Removes all manually set
43471 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43472 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43479 dialog when changing the document class.
43482 \begin_layout Section
43484 \begin_inset space ~
43488 \begin_inset Index idx
43491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43500 \begin_layout Subsection
43502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43504 name "sub:Converters"
43509 \begin_inset Index idx
43512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43521 \begin_layout Standard
43522 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
43523 from one format to another.
43524 You can modify converters or create new ones.
43525 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
43532 \begin_inset space ~
43537 field and press the
43542 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
43546 \begin_inset space ~
43551 drop-down list, modify the
43555 field and press the
43562 \begin_layout Standard
43565 Converter File Cache
43571 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
43573 Maximum Age (in days
43576 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
43577 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
43580 \begin_layout Standard
43581 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
43582 definition, is described in the section
43593 \begin_layout Subsection
43595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43597 name "sec:File-Formats"
43602 \begin_inset Index idx
43605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43612 \begin_inset Index idx
43615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43624 \begin_layout Standard
43625 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
43634 programs that should be used for certain formats.
43637 \begin_layout Standard
43638 You can also define the
43640 Default output format
43642 that is used when you use
43644 View, Update, View Master Document
43648 Update Master Document
43654 menu or the toolbar.
43657 \begin_layout Standard
43658 More about formats and their options is described in the section
43669 \begin_layout Standard
43670 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
43671 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
43672 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
43673 This is done by specifying a
43678 More about this is described in the section
43689 \begin_layout Chapter
43690 Units available in LyX
43691 \begin_inset Index idx
43694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43703 name "chap:Units-available-in"
43710 \begin_layout Standard
43712 \begin_inset space ~
43716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43718 reference "tab:Units"
43722 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
43725 \begin_layout Standard
43726 \begin_inset Float table
43732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43733 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43751 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43759 \begin_inset Tabular
43760 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
43761 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
43762 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
43763 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
43765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43914 scaled point (65536
43915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43975 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
43979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44030 % of original image width
44037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44244 \begin_layout Chapter
44246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44248 name "chap:Credits"
44255 \begin_layout Standard
44256 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
44257 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
44260 \begin_layout Itemize
44263 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
44266 \begin_layout Itemize
44272 \begin_layout Itemize
44278 \begin_layout Itemize
44284 \begin_layout Itemize
44290 \begin_layout Itemize
44296 \begin_layout Itemize
44302 \begin_layout Itemize
44308 \begin_layout Itemize
44311 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
44314 \begin_layout Itemize
44320 \begin_layout Itemize
44326 \begin_layout Itemize
44332 \begin_layout Itemize
44338 \begin_layout Itemize
44344 \begin_layout Itemize
44350 \begin_layout Itemize
44356 \begin_layout Itemize
44362 \begin_layout Itemize
44364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44373 \begin_layout Standard
44374 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
44377 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
44384 \begin_layout Bibliography
44385 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44386 LatexCommand bibitem
44393 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44396 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
44401 \begin_inset Newline newline
44405 \begin_inset Flex URL
44408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44410 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
44418 \begin_layout Bibliography
44419 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44420 LatexCommand bibitem
44421 key "latexcompanion"
44425 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
44427 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
44430 Addison-Wesley, 2004
44433 \begin_layout Bibliography
44434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44435 LatexCommand bibitem
44440 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
44443 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
44446 Addison-Wesley, 2003
44449 \begin_layout Bibliography
44450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44451 LatexCommand bibitem
44458 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
44461 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
44464 \begin_layout Bibliography
44465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44466 LatexCommand bibitem
44478 Addison-Wesley, 1984
44481 \begin_layout Bibliography
44482 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44483 LatexCommand bibitem
44489 \begin_inset Newline newline
44493 \begin_inset Flex URL
44496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44498 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
44506 \begin_layout Bibliography
44507 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44508 LatexCommand bibitem
44514 \begin_inset Newline newline
44518 \begin_inset Flex URL
44521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44523 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
44531 \begin_layout Bibliography
44532 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44533 LatexCommand bibitem
44539 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44541 name "Documentation"
44542 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
44551 \begin_inset Newline newline
44555 \begin_inset Flex URL
44558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44560 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
44568 \begin_layout Bibliography
44569 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44570 LatexCommand bibitem
44576 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44578 name "Documentation"
44579 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
44583 how to use the program
44588 \begin_inset Newline newline
44592 \begin_inset Flex URL
44595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44597 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
44605 \begin_layout Bibliography
44606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44607 LatexCommand bibitem
44613 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44615 name "Documentation"
44616 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
44625 \begin_inset Newline newline
44629 \begin_inset Flex URL
44632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44634 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
44642 \begin_layout Bibliography
44643 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44644 LatexCommand bibitem
44650 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44652 name "Documentation"
44653 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
44662 \begin_inset Newline newline
44666 \begin_inset Flex URL
44669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44671 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
44679 \begin_layout Bibliography
44680 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44681 LatexCommand bibitem
44687 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44689 name "Documentation"
44690 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
44694 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
44695 \begin_inset Newline newline
44699 \begin_inset Flex URL
44702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44704 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
44712 \begin_layout Bibliography
44713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44714 LatexCommand bibitem
44720 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44722 name "Documentation"
44723 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
44727 of the LaTeX-package
44732 \begin_inset Index idx
44735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44736 LaTeX-packages ! caption
44742 \begin_inset Newline newline
44746 \begin_inset Flex URL
44749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44751 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
44759 \begin_layout Bibliography
44760 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44761 LatexCommand bibitem
44767 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44769 name "Documentation"
44770 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
44774 of the LaTeX-package
44779 \begin_inset Index idx
44782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44783 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
44789 \begin_inset Newline newline
44793 \begin_inset Flex URL
44796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44798 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
44806 \begin_layout Bibliography
44807 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44808 LatexCommand bibitem
44814 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44816 name "Documentation"
44817 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
44821 of the LaTeX-package
44826 \begin_inset Index idx
44829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44830 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
44836 \begin_inset Newline newline
44840 \begin_inset Flex URL
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44845 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
44853 \begin_layout Bibliography
44854 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44855 LatexCommand bibitem
44861 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44863 name "Documentation"
44864 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
44868 of the LaTeX-package
44873 \begin_inset Index idx
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44877 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
44883 \begin_inset Newline newline
44887 \begin_inset Flex URL
44890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44892 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
44900 \begin_layout Bibliography
44901 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44902 LatexCommand bibitem
44908 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44910 name "Documentation"
44911 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
44915 of the LaTeX-package
44920 \begin_inset Index idx
44923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44924 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
44930 \begin_inset Newline newline
44934 \begin_inset Flex URL
44937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44939 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
44947 \begin_layout Bibliography
44948 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44949 LatexCommand bibitem
44955 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44957 name "Documentation"
44958 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
44962 of the LaTeX-package
44967 \begin_inset Index idx
44970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44971 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
44977 \begin_inset Newline newline
44981 \begin_inset Flex URL
44984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44986 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
44994 \begin_layout Bibliography
44995 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44996 LatexCommand bibitem
45002 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45004 name "Documentation"
45005 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
45009 of the LaTeX-package
45014 \begin_inset Index idx
45017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45018 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
45024 \begin_inset Newline newline
45028 \begin_inset Flex URL
45031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45033 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
45041 \begin_layout Bibliography
45042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45043 LatexCommand bibitem
45049 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45051 name "Documentation"
45052 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf"
45056 of the LaTeX-package
45061 \begin_inset Index idx
45064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45065 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
45071 \begin_inset Newline newline
45075 \begin_inset Flex URL
45078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45080 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf
45088 \begin_layout Bibliography
45089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45090 LatexCommand bibitem
45096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45099 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
45103 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
45104 \begin_inset Newline newline
45108 \begin_inset Flex URL
45111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45113 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
45121 \begin_layout Bibliography
45122 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45123 LatexCommand bibitem
45129 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45132 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
45136 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
45137 \begin_inset Newline newline
45141 \begin_inset Flex URL
45144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45146 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
45154 \begin_layout Bibliography
45155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45156 LatexCommand bibitem
45162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45165 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
45169 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
45170 \begin_inset Newline newline
45174 \begin_inset Flex URL
45177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45179 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
45187 \begin_layout Bibliography
45188 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45189 LatexCommand bibitem
45195 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45198 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
45202 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
45203 \begin_inset Newline newline
45207 \begin_inset Flex URL
45210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45212 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
45220 \begin_layout Bibliography
45221 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45222 LatexCommand bibitem
45228 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45231 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
45235 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
45236 \begin_inset Newline newline
45240 \begin_inset Flex URL
45243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45245 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
45253 \begin_layout Bibliography
45254 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45255 LatexCommand bibitem
45261 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45264 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
45268 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
45269 \begin_inset Newline newline
45273 \begin_inset Flex URL
45276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45278 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
45286 \begin_layout Bibliography
45287 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45288 LatexCommand bibitem
45294 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45297 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
45301 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
45302 \begin_inset Newline newline
45306 \begin_inset Flex URL
45309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45311 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
45319 \begin_layout Bibliography
45320 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45321 LatexCommand bibitem
45327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45330 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
45334 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
45335 \begin_inset Newline newline
45339 \begin_inset Flex URL
45342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45344 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
45352 \begin_layout Bibliography
45353 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45354 LatexCommand bibitem
45360 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45363 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
45367 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
45368 \begin_inset Newline newline
45372 \begin_inset Flex URL
45375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45377 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
45385 \begin_layout Bibliography
45386 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45387 LatexCommand bibitem
45393 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45396 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
45400 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
45401 \begin_inset Newline newline
45405 \begin_inset Flex URL
45408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45410 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
45418 \begin_layout Bibliography
45419 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45420 LatexCommand bibitem
45426 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45429 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
45433 about new features in
45438 \begin_inset Newline newline
45442 \begin_inset Flex URL
45445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
45455 \begin_layout Standard
45456 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45490 \begin_inset Note Note
45493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45500 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
45501 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
45502 bibliography is the second one:
45510 \begin_layout Standard
45511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
45512 LatexCommand bibtex
45513 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
45514 options "biblio/alphadin"
45521 \begin_layout Standard
45522 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
45525 \begin_layout Standard
45526 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
45527 LatexCommand printnomenclature
45533 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
45534 LatexCommand printindex